JP2019208757A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a setting suggestion performance.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: special state control means capable of controlling a state to a non-special state and a special state in which a state is more frequently controlled to a specific state than the non-special state; setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting value; game control means capable of executing control relating to an advantageous state based on the setting value; and setting suggestion performance executing means capable of executing the setting suggestion performance relating to the setting means when a state is controlled in the special state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-47

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player There is something that was configured. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started by variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Some of these gaming machines are configured to be able to be controlled to a special state that is frequently controlled to a special state. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that in the probability variation gaming state, the frequency of control for small hits increases (see FIGS. 9 and 10).

JP2018-33787A

  However, as with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is not enough to be entertained simply by being configured to execute an effect associated with a small hit.

  In view of the above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state. A special state that can be controlled between a non-special state (for example, a non-KT state) and a special state (for example, a KT state) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than the non-special state. One of control means (for example, a part for executing steps 044IWS2208, S2211, S2213, S2214, etc. in the gaming control microcomputer 100) and a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) Setting means (for example, steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed. The game control means (for example, the part for executing steps 038IWS59A and S59B in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control related to the advantageous state based on the set value, and the special state. And a setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes step 044IWS9726 according to a process table including the setting value suggestion effect selected in step 044IWS9724 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect related to the setting means. It is characterized by.
According to such a configuration, interest in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1), the gaming machine is capable of variable display, and is controlled to be in an advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result. Possible advantageous state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and a special display result (for example, a variable display result different from the specific display result) Special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) that can be controlled to a special state when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. , Use judgment values for determining the variable display result (eg judgment value for big hit judgment, judgment value for small hit judgment) Variable display result determination means for determining a variable display result (for example, a part for executing steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, and S64B in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the determination value is specified as the variable display result A specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for determining that the display result is derived and displayed, and a special determination value (for example, for determining that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result) And the number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate game play.

(3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, the set value suggestion during the small hit game) An effect can be executed (see FIG. 10-47).
According to such a structure, the interest of setting suggestion production can be improved.

(4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the setting suggestion effect execution means, as the setting suggestion effect, a first set value suggestion effect that suggests a set value and the first set value suggestion effect The second set value suggesting effect with higher reliability of the suggestion for the set value can be executed, and the second set value suggesting effect can be executed at a different ratio depending on the number of times of the special state control in the special state ( For example, when the number of small hits in the second KT state is 30 times or more, a setting value suggestion effect with higher suggestion reliability (that is, higher accuracy) is executed than when it is less than 30 times. In addition, for example, when the number of small hits in the second KT state is 30 times or more, the setting value suggesting effect C is performed with higher reliability of suggestion (that is, higher accuracy) than when it is less than 30 times. 10- is high. 3 (A), may be configured as (B) refer).
According to such a structure, the interest of setting suggestion production can be improved.

(5) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), the setting suggestion effect executing means includes a first set value suggestion effect and a first set value suggestion effect that suggest a set value as the setting suggestion effect. The second set value suggesting effect having a higher degree of reliability of the suggestion for the set value can be executed, and the second set value suggesting effect can be executed at a different ratio depending on the game value given in the special state ( For example, when the number of prize balls in the second KT state is 1000 or more, a setting value suggestion effect with higher suggestion reliability (that is, higher accuracy) is executed than when it is less than 1000. For example, when the number of prize balls in the second KT state is 1000 or more, the ratio of execution of the set value suggestion effect C having a higher suggestion reliability (that is, higher accuracy) than the case of less than 1000 times. 10 is high. 44 (A), may be configured as (B) refer).
According to such a structure, the interest of setting suggestion production can be improved.

(6) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), the setting suggestion effect execution means, as the setting suggestion effect, a first set value suggestion effect that suggests a set value and the first set value suggestion effect The second set value suggesting effect having a higher degree of reliability of the suggestion for the set value can be executed, and the second set value suggesting effect can be executed at a different ratio depending on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state ( For example, when the number of fluctuations in the second KT state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number when the second KT state ends, the reliability of the suggestion is higher (that is, the accuracy is higher) than when the number is less than the predetermined number. In addition, for example, when the second KT state ends, if the number of changes in the second KT state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the suggestion is more effective than the case where the number is less than the predetermined number. Is highly reliable ( Percentage ie probable) set value indicates presentation C is performed is high.) It may be configured so.
According to such a structure, the interest of setting suggestion production can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of alerting | reporting when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs after the set value is confirmed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball apparatus in the characteristic part 038IW. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. in the characteristic part 038IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the big hit probability and the small hit probability for every setting value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of a special variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the open pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol fluctuation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol fluctuation | variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an accessory control normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit release process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit end process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the method of a game state transition. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table in a modification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect at the time of big hit occurrence. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect in the case of a big hit based on the fluctuation | variation of the 2nd special symbol in a normal state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of setting value suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the setting value suggestion effect in a modification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  Also, a right-handed indicator 26 is provided below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B for urging a right-handed operation for performing a launch operation aiming at the right side of the game area. Yes. The right-handed display 26 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and is controlled to be turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display for which execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. Note that a display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  Further, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The right-handed notification LED 37 is controlled to be turned on by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first start winning opening is provided. The game ball won in the first start winning opening is led to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first start opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Further, a nail row 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first start winning opening is provided. Has been. Thus, by providing the nail row 19 that prevents the game balls that have flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, a shooting operation of the game balls aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed) Only when the operation is performed, the game ball can be won at the first start winning opening.

  In this example, the case where the game ball is configured to be awarded at the first start winning opening only when left-handed operation is performed by providing the nail row 19 is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the first start winning opening may be configured so that a game ball can be won at the first starting winning opening only when left-handed operation is performed because the first starting winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area. The game ball may be awarded to the first start winning opening only when the mouth is provided on the left side of the game area and the nail row 19 is also provided to make a left-handed operation.

  A passage gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

  Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down, by moving forward and backward in the front-rear direction. The game is changed between an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won in a grand prize opening located below the member. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the big hit gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state where the head is moved forward, the bottom member is moved backward and the opening control is performed to open the large winning opening serving as the winning area.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 for forming a special winning port for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second start winning port. As shown, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is disposed on the left side, and the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-like bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-rear direction. By moving forward / backward, an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening and a second start winning opening located below the bottom member, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won (both in a closed state) Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 has the bottom member in the small hit gaming state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. From the closed state in which the forward movement is performed forward, the bottom member is moved backward to perform the opening control to open the special winning opening serving as the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, An opening control is performed to open the second start winning opening that becomes the winning area.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves from the upper left to the lower right and falls onto the variable winning ball device 6B below the special variable winning ball device 7.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left. The game balls on the winning ball device 6B move from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B if the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are closed. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other. If the bottom ball member of the variable prize ball device 6B is moved backward and the second start prize opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second start prize slot and the special variable prize ball is dropped. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball apparatus 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is moved backward to open the special winning opening, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 and falls to the out opening as it is.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces that reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom member. Yes. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-rear direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case where there is no restriction piece.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is arranged on the right side. When the bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B starts from the special variable winning ball device. In this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that.

  A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball won in the grand prize opening is provided in the big prize opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is in the open state, it is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled to be closed and the grand prize opening is in a closed state, it is impossible for the player to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the big prize opening. It becomes disadvantageous.

  A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a game ball won in the special prize opening is provided in the special prize opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) through the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than when the gaming ball has won the big winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball passes (enters) through another prize opening, such as the first start prize opening 1 or the second start prize opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is impossible for the player to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the special winning opening. It becomes disadvantageous.

  In addition, a second start port switch 22B capable of detecting a game ball won in the second start winning port is provided in the second start winning port. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  In this pachinko machine 1, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, so that in the big hit game or KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims to the right side of the game area (so-called right-handed operation) )I do.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating “0” to “9”, lighting patterns such as “−”, and the like. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game proceeds to the big hit gaming state based on the passing of the game ball through the pass gate 41, so that the pass gate 41 also serves as an operating area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays both roles of a normal starting area and an operating area.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect frame LED 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. .

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is a normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a launch operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming to the left of the game area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by a rotation operation on the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special symbol display is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, a “hit” is obtained. . Further, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”. Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at a very low rate and may be “small hit”.

  After the display result in the first special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the upper open limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, there are multiple types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) Accordingly, the jackpot type is set accordingly. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state may be controlled according to the big hit type.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  In the KT state, KT control is performed which tends to be a small hit compared to the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, so that fewer prize balls are obtained compared to the big hit game state, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the high base state, control (short-time control) is performed (short-time control) that shortens the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) from the normal state (short-time state). The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also performed by improving the probability of The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is an advantageous state for the player.

  The probability variation state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the end conditions is satisfied first, such as a predetermined number of special game runs or the next big hit game state is started. To do. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut probability change or the like).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a jackpot gaming state advantageous for a player, a probability change state, a KT state, a high base state, or the like, and the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the same manner as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a predetermined return process is not executed after power-on as in the case of a system reset). It is a state to be done.

  When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a launch operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. A right-handed operation is performed by a player's rotation operation on the batting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game on the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on a jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “hit”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is set. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the second special game is “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is in an open state in a predetermined opening mode. Similar to the big hit type, the “small hit” may be provided with the small hit type.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed).

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the point of the frame LED 9 Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. You may make it perform a pseudo-continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) And the like (a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and turned on) is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the prize winning door. The information is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the special winning opening solenoid 83.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating operation contents as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (signal for designating the sound to be output) in order to perform audio output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. An LED signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the LED) is supplied to the board 13 or the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The sound control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. The LED control board 14 drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and LED on / off.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes sound output, LED on / off control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power failure to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process for each timer interruption, the execution of the first special symbol game and the management of the suspension are realized (details will be described later). In addition, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby realizing execution of the second special symbol game, management of suspension, and the like. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol in parallel.

  Following the first special symbol process and the second special symbol process, the CPU 103 executes an accessory control process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process for each timer interruption, control of the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, control of the gaming state, and the like are realized (details will be described later).

  Following the accessory control process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Although omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine. Processing is also performed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that it is a period for performing a right-handed operation. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the KT state during the big hit game or during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol. On the other hand, in the test terminal process, the CPU 103 does not perform control for outputting a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

  In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning at the first start winning opening, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in a first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Is done. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the first reserved memory number, transmission for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the first reserved memory number, and the prefetch determination on the effect control board 12 Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning set thus transmitted is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

  After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process (steps S110A to S113A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In the first special symbol normal process, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” or “big hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. . Thereafter, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the first special symbol normal process ends.

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In the first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated using random value values for variation pattern determination based on a predetermined determination result or the like as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Processing to determine either is included. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In the first special symbol variation process, a process for setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A, and an elapsed time after the first special symbol starts varying are measured. Processing to be included. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time from the start of the first special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the first special symbol variation process is completed. To do.

  In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol change process (step S112A) is shifted to the first special symbol change process. When the special symbol variation display is in progress, there is a case where the second special symbol variation display becomes a small hit and is controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is being played (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit release). It is determined whether or not the value is equivalent to the process to the small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process Thus, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, during the small hit game based on the second special symbol variation display, the first special symbol variation display is interrupted, and after the small hit game ends, the first special symbol variation display is resumed. You are in control. In addition, not only in such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the first special symbol started to change is interrupted (timer The update may be interrupted).

  Further, for example, the small hitting ending period as the small hitting end processing period may be varied depending on the gaming state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the interrupt period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the interrupt period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative design, and this will produce an uncomfortable feeling for the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hitting ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

  Also, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, the game ball is substantially difficult to win in the small hit control and no particular effect is given, so the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. You may comprise. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and an effect that emphasizes the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than that in the first KT state. . In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

  Furthermore, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit release pre-processing period, the length of the period may be varied depending on the gaming state as in the small hit ending period.

  The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In the first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the variation of the first special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol. A process for setting is included. When the display result is “big hit”, a setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, processing for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. . When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

  The process executed in the second special symbol process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process described with reference to FIG. 5, if “first” is read as “second”, the second special symbol process is described. Each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process (step S25B) is stored as a hold information in a second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102.

  In this example, since the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the process shifts to the second special symbol change process and changes in the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, there may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, which may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is being performed (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit release). It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the process to the small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation process Thus, if the small hit game is not in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, during the small hit game based on the first special symbol variation display, the second special symbol variation display is interrupted, and after the small hit game ends, the second special symbol variation display is resumed. You are in control. Not only such control but also, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the second special symbol started to change is interrupted (timer The update may be interrupted).

  In addition, regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be varied depending on the gaming state.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process. In this accessory control process, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The accessory control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “0”. In this accessory control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the jackpot game is performed, and if the setting for starting the jackpot game is performed, the process for starting the jackpot game is performed. The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “1”.

  The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control for waiting for the passing of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “2”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”, and the jackpot release pre-processing is completed.

  The big hit release processing in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “4”. Then, the processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “3”, while when the round execution count has reached the upper limit execution count, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to “5”. When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The jackpot end process in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for making various settings for starting control, KT control, and high base control. When such a setting is performed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end process ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes, for example, a process for setting a special winning opening in an open state in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “7”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the special prize opening is opened, and the timing for returning the special prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “8”, and the small hit release process ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, a lighting operation in the decorative light emitter such as the frame LED 9 and the decoration LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control for operating various effect devices such as operation is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the LED control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. It is updated to 7 ″, and the big hit effect processing is finished.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R and a frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being accommodated in the board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. Further, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuations of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling on / off / coloring of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be viewed from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 stores various winning information related to winning. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting to 100 and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is sealed in a board case 21TM201 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a display monitor 21TM029 is placed at the center of the main board 11. (For example, 7 segments) is arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front when the main board 11 is viewed is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened. This is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) includes each prize opening (large prize winning opening, second starting winning prize opening, first starting winning prize opening, first to fourth general winning prize openings, hereinafter referred to as “entrance area”. The number of game balls entering (also referred to as) is counted, and various winning information such as run ratio and role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. In this way, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as a connection ratio and a role ratio after installation in the amusement hall. That is, it is normal for the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to design the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening as frequently as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The power supply board is enclosed in a substrate case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate) to be described later is changed at the lower right side of the back of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches are provided. A game shop clerk or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state in which the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037 is predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk possessing a predetermined key can operate. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only a store clerk possessing a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among the store clerk of the game store. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key. The switch 21TM051 can execute the switching operation and execute an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation. Possible switches may be used.

  Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like in the game hall. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that the key can be inserted / removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game shop clerk or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used for discharging the game balls that have won the winning holes and the game balls that have entered the out holes to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a released game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The discharge port switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and a decoration. LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the LEDs for use are included.

  FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9B, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2 and a front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. (Error) is also determined. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer. 21TM370 can distinguish and recognize the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect a clogged game ball, that is, a so-called ball bite. . In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball short switch 21TM187 indicates a full ball state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. A full tank signal is output. The launch motor signal output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. The firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals to / from the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are placed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal by putting specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of the winning ball request signal, and the award for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the winning ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the winning ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It transmits to the microcomputer 100 for control. In addition, when a predetermined error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, or out of ball) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of balls to be lapped through an output port 21TM372b to a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, but is not shown in FIG. 9-2.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball cut LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is not shown in FIG. 9-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

  In response to the player's operation, the card board 21TM050 receives a ball switch signal indicating that the ball switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending possible display signal are provided from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the dispensing control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066 as shown in FIG. 9-2.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of rental balls. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to fall. Thereafter, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100 on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. It is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process described later, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of 6 stages of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of variable display, a determination value for jackpot is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, then the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”. ing. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the big probability is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, A big hit is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of “2”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/250) than the cases of “2” and “3”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/235) than the cases of “2”, “3”, and “4”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 is used, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is a variable display target.

  In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). In other words, the big win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. Note that the “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). Separately, jackpot determination is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Also good.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The setting value that can be set to may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
Receiving the setting command, the effect control CPU 120 can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which a “sunny” ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows that a “cloudy” ending screen is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which an “ending” image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to CPU 120 for effect control. In addition, when the big hit gaming state is ended, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the ending effect mode based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value designated by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the big hit gaming state is ended, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended (“BONUS end”). It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (a clear mode, a cloudy mode, a rain mode) determined based on the set value.

  In the table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3,4”, and “5, 6”. , When determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect to the “clear” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), determining to the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), and FIG. When the “rain” mode shown in 5 (3) is determined, the determination value is assigned.

  When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the “sunny” mode setting indication shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute an effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a moderate rate (for example, 40%), and medium It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 40%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and medium It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 has a “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and medium It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by changing the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player will be interested in how the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot gaming state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in a “sunny” manner. Expect to be.

(Power-on processing)
Next, power-on processing will be described.
FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, any one of 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are regular values, and six setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like. The setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like. The setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

  Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from a gaming machine manufacturer (before being installed in the game hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether a setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode is changed to a setting changing mode described later (step S21TM4580) and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an ON state (step S21TM4040).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not the RAM clear (game state initialization) is determined to be executed. When the value is 1, the RAM clear is determined to be executed. It has been shown. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be.

  The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  On the other hand, if clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opened. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected for the gaming control microcomputer 100, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. When the detection signal indicating that this is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 By inputting the detection signal, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. The setting value can be confirmed and changed when the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value can be confirmed when the setting confirmation mode is entered.

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( If the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070) and / or Or confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is selected? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

  In the present embodiment, in order to obtain a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed although the change of the setting value is not permitted, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2 ) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state are necessary. The CPU 103 can check the set value when it is confirmed that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070 (setting check) Mode). In addition to the conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). On the condition that this is done, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, as will be described later.

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated in order to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and is operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or is inaccurate. The setting value may be confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to allow the setting value to be confirmed or changed, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. In addition, neither the setting change mode nor the setting change mode is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is possible to control, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in an open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in an open state, a setting confirmation mode and a setting change mode It is also possible not to control either of them.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), step S21TM4760, which will be described later, is controlled without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send Setting Command).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. In the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. In the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

  Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, NO is determined in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. In addition, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. If the setting change mode was controlled when the previous power failure occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that a setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

  In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). And the process after step S21TM4510 relevant to setting change mode shown to FIGS. 9-7 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON in step S21TM4130 (NO in step S21TM4130), if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON in step S21TM4140 (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. Setting value error To send over command to effect control for the CPU120.

  When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message “Setting value may be abnormal” is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to switch to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power supply is temporarily turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off). To notify the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (to confirm the set value). For example, a message “Please turn on the power after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode” is displayed. Note that similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) until the power is cut off.

  In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., so that “the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)”. Despite the possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all being judged as YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) has not been established and the transition to the setting change mode has not been made. Notification is made (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit provided corresponding to the gaming machine, or a calling lamp device). Is done.

  During the loop processing, the letter “E” is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms weight, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the mode has not been changed to the setting change mode.

  The loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on, and when it is determined as YES in step S21TM4030), the game should not be performed in this state, Before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to determine the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, (3) The three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are necessary. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the setting value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if it is determined NO in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process described above (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).

  If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), it is impossible to shift to the normal game process. Therefore, the store clerk or the like of the game hall must turn the pachinko gaming machine 1 off once and turn on the power again. Don't be. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is temporarily turned off, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Thus, the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 determines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. You may make it prompt to make a power supply OFF state by making it light-emit in a power-off instruction | indication mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value change is not permitted but the setting value can be checked (setting check mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

  However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state. Even if the two conditions are satisfied (YES in step S21TM4130), the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO) The game is controlled to be in a game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 sets “0” having the lowest jackpot probability as the regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, control goes to a step S21TM4530.

  Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530) and then executes a power-off process (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 checks whether a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power outage is input. If a power-off signal is input, the CPU 103 Immediately before the operation cannot be performed due to the stop, the power supply stop process is executed. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

  As a result, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repetition process of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the repetition process of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed) When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power supply is restored.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0-5) stored in the set value storage area. The game shop clerk normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, so if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as it is, the game shop clerk actually There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is not executed after completion of the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode), the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (the setting change mode here) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility of being present is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. For this reason, when a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) at the next power-on.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that control has been performed in the setting change mode (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting switch information indicating whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

  Each time the game shop clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the control is changed to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on or when the previous power cut occurs) is 3. If there is a setting change, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 and the display monitor 21TM029 is updated accordingly. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

  Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and send the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the update of the setting value (step S21TM4620) are equivalent to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes in steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (determined as NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag) Is controlled to be 0).

  In addition, the current setting value display (step S21TM4550) and security signal output (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command transmission (step S21TM4590) and the setting value update (step S21TM4620) can be executed. This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

  In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). The RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is cut off. When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. When the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state or not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the process after step S21TM4540 is repeated after waiting for 4 ms again (step S21TM4530). That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control in the setting confirmation mode is continued. If the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control in the setting change mode is continued.

  If lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process shifts to the normal game process. Will be. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when the game signal reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, output of the security signal is started (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are started. In response to the end of any control in the mode, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed since the end of any control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

  Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is executed as a common process. In addition, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (determining which mode is controlled). It is executed as a common process. In this way, security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control when controlled in the setting change mode and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control burden can be reduced.

  Also, security signal output is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, a common value (1000 ms) is used for the security signal when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The timer is set. However, if both security signal output start control and output end control are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, any mode is set on the external device side. It will be difficult to know if it has been controlled.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once set in step S21TM4710. After 1000 ms is set as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. Yes. In other words, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset to 30 sec (overwritten).

  When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is the end of the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is controlled as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2). 1 sec has elapsed, and when it is controlled in the setting change mode, 30 sec has elapsed since the end of the setting change mode.

  Specifically, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interruption after the interruption is permitted. In processing (for example, information output processing), when the security signal output is continued until the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1000 ms to 0 ms and controlled to the setting change mode (when the RAM is cleared, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt processing (for example, information output processing) after interrupt permission. The security signal output is continued until In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode or when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before the transition to the game control timer interrupt processing. The security signal output may be continued until 0 ms until the game control timer interruption process is completed after the security signal output ends.

  As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the setting confirmation mode control is finished and when the setting change mode control is finished, and the setting change mode is controlled. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the setting change mode control is completed. With such a configuration, the security signal output period can be made different between the case where the setting check mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled while sharing the security signal output control.

  As a result, in the external device, it is possible to grasp whether the initialization process has been executed and the setting check mode has been controlled, or whether the initialization process has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled. . For example, if the security signal output period is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the security signal output period is 30 seconds or more, the initial state It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that control processing has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

  Note that a security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (which is cleared by the initialization process) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. A security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

  Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, so the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized but remains set in the signal output process. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. In other words, it is possible to limit the security signal output period to a period until one second elapses from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is executed, so that the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (the occurrence of power failure occurs). As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode (according to the execution of the RAM clear). Period).

  In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the first time after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The value of the security signal timer to be set to suffices to be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output. For example, it may be 50 ms or more. That is, the common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power change occurs after the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if the mode is not controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed, and the setting command is transmitted.

  Here, the player normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the set command (value stored in the set value storage area) is directly displayed on the effect control CPU 120 side as an image. If displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the setting value (1 to 6), An effect that suggests a set value is executed in a range.

  Not only in such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0-5) stored in the setting value storage area in the setting command, and effects control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. Thereby, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting values (1 to 6) designated by the setting command are displayed on the image display device 5 as they are, or an effect suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) designated by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be notified or suggested appropriately. Further, it is not necessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control burden on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Moreover, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

  If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step In step S21TM4020, it is determined that the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). Therefore, it is only necessary to execute processing at the time of power-off recovery without clearing the RAM.

  If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after interrupt permission, the game control timer interrupt processing (special (Including design process processing). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is 0 based on the value of the RAM clear flag. Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power-off recovery, and the process proceeds to normal game processing.

  Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 has recovered from the power-off based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed) )). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the frame LED 9, the recovery from the power interruption has been performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clear is not performed) can be notified.

  On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute processing at power-on accompanied by RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes processing for setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer, and processing when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. The game control timer interrupt processing (including special symbol process processing and the like) may be performed after the interrupt is permitted.

  As illustrated in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, hold memory, etc.) is cleared to the initial value. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a role ratio, and a base is stored is not cleared. The value is not changed from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is.

  The reason for not clearing the setting value stored in the setting value storage area in this RAM clearing process is as follows. (A) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. (B) When controlled to the setting change mode, the value in the setting value storage area has been set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or in the setting change mode. This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear process, it is impossible to control the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the set value storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random symbol counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and the like are flags that are selectively processed according to the control state. The initial value is set.

  After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, a big hit determination in the special symbol process is executed based on the set value read out here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or at the end of the setting change mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 performs the initialization process based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without performing the recovery from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like have been initialized (data when power supply is stopped). Based on the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without being recovered from the power interruption.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. become. If the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The security signal timer value is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed. It remains.

  In step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, when the value of the security signal timer is set, a security signal is output in the game control timer interruption process after the interruption is permitted (information output process). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed with the permission of the interrupt, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

  Then, CPU 103 executes setting processing of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. In addition, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt permitted state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). This shifts to a normal game process capable of executing a game control timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a special symbol stop symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit. The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of sending a command signal to control other microcomputers, or the game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this example, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process has been shifted to the power-off recovery process. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (according to the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). It is also possible to shift to the processing at the time of power-off recovery.

  In this example, if the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process has shifted to the process at power-on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (the gaming machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

  As described above, a game clerk or the like turns the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the gaming state and the like (to execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state and the like. Can not be initialized (NO in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). As described above, the game shop clerk can select whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state and the like. Yes.

  As described above, if the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, the setting value is unstable because it was controlled to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the setting value to be determined on the game hall side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030) (step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output corresponding to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (game control timer interrupt processing is executed), and when the power is turned on, It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when a disconnection occurred.

  Also, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 sets the condition (in step S21TM4030: YES) for shifting to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). When all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), a setting value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) and the display monitor is in a game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the letter “E” on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, each of the seven-segment display devices 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed with the letter “E”, thereby causing an occurrence of an abnormality in the game hall clerk (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off in the controlled state). The presentation control CPU 120 that has received the set value abnormality error command displays a message on the image display device 5 "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode", thereby playing the game hall. To change the set value by switching to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off). Notification is made to prompt the user to confirm (set the set value).

  In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“turn the power on again after power off”) Please change to the setting change mode ").

  Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “Setting change mode is in progress” or a message “Please change the setting value by performing setting change operation” can be displayed on the image display device 5. Thereby, the clerk of the game hall can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and the set value stored in the set value storage area by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to the scheduled setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the setting value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any of the above conditions is not established, the control is not performed in the setting change mode, but is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the setting value abnormality error command transmission (step S21TM4190). . As a result, error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power is turned off”). To change to the setting change mode ").

  In this way, error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and message display on the effect control board 12 side (“turn on power again after power off”) ”) Is also performed, the game machine status is set to the setting change mode after the power is restored even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the game shop clerk, etc. are not controlled in the setting change mode, and know that the game is stopped (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). Is possible. Therefore, after turning off the power supply once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the scheduled setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game process.

  Thus, when a power interruption occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

  Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. Therefore, the mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode without being displayed, and an unnecessary error display can be avoided and the setting value can be appropriately changed.

  On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the power cannot be changed to the setting changing mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting changing mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) Will be done. Thereby, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

  When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii) may not be established, and a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

  For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal and the transition to the setting change mode is performed (or the transition condition is satisfied). When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the command, the message “Setting value may be abnormal” and the message “Automatically controlled in the setting change mode” are displayed as images. It may be displayed on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game processing, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. In response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting switch (clear switch) ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  The production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) is controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. In spite of the absence, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “The operation of the lock switch has been detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “Setting changeover switch operation detected” is executed. As a result, the game store clerk clearly understands that the operation for changing the setting value was performed despite being not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Can be confirmed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game process. The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for checking the set value is not checked. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

(Modification of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM has been cleared, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

  Not only in such a form, but as shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without confirming whether it is established or not (step S21TM4570, NO).

  In the process shown in FIGS. 9-11, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If it is determined (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied (step S21TM4150). The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled by the game stop state (processing corresponding to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

  Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power interruption occurs during the change.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. And (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, and is controlled to the setting change mode (determined NO in step S21TM4570). If the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting values in the setting value storage area can be changed) (i) to (iii). Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

  As described above, when the power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. Regardless of whether or not is established, the setting change mode is automatically controlled, so that the workability for determining the set value can be improved.

  If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition that (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to Step S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

  As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the store clerk who has performed the setting value changing operation once sets the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state to confirm the setting value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

  As described above, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set. The conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation for switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode, Appropriately shift to normal game processing.

  Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification for urging the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be issued. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a set value abnormality error command (to the above-described step S21TM4190). The production control CPU 120 that has received the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, “Turn on the lock switch once and switch it off after changing the set value”. The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and FIGS. 9-11, it is impossible to shift to the normal game process when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance. If the setting value is not changed and the setting change mode is not terminated, the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to make sure that the setting value is changed to the setting change mode and the setting change operation is performed and the setting value is confirmed.

(Set value storage control when power failure occurs while changing set values)
Next, the setting value storage control when the power interruption occurs during the setting value change will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

  First, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value during the setting change mode, FIG. Explanation will be made using -12 (1).

  As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “0” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and the read setting value is set to 1. “1” is added to the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “1” to “1”, and “2” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “1” based on the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “2” to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed, the power is cut off. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state where the setting value “2” after the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated is stored. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as a setting value. This set value “2” is a value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the occurrence of power interruption during the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Since the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIGS. 9-11 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even when the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

  In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power switch is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored. The setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, there may be a setting value that has already been scheduled. Thus, the workability can be improved because the gaming machine may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  Next, regarding a control in the case where a power failure occurs after a setting value changing operation is performed during the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends), This will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

  Order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change mode ends. Accordingly, the setting value “2” after the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated is determined as the final setting value. At this time, “2” is stored as a setting value in the setting value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the determined setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  Thereafter, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that an operation for turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as a setting value. This set value “2” is a value that is finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in order 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. Will be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is finished. In any case, when the power is restored, the setting value that has been changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power is turned off is The set value is valid (the set value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

  The setting value storage control shown in FIG. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is controlled when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area and the setting value is confirmed based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0-5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in accordance with the change of the setting value stored in.

  With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled by turning on the power and a setting changing operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the operation for ending the change mode is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state) and the power is cut off, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is It has not been changed since the time of input (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on last time is continuously held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value.

  In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine a set value when a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  In the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided. Although it is applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting value (for example, all of the setting values 0 to 5) It can also be applied to a gaming machine whose jackpot probability is 1/300.

  In addition, the feature 21TM discloses the following invention.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. For gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when the setting value is changed, it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side However, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp this on the external device side even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in JP 2014-200506 A (paragraph 0102) is applied. is there. The invention relating to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of a control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
Specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560); ,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (a value of the security signal timer) relating to a period during which the specific signal is output;
The setting means is capable of setting a common predetermined value when controlled in the setting change mode and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode (in step S21TM4710, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). The security signal is continuously output until 1 second has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the external device of the state of the gaming machine related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the game state (game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the gaming state with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting change mode),
The setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value after setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465)
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode) The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during a period corresponding to the predetermined value when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so that the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are different outputs while sharing the setting process by the setting means. A period can be set.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing the specific information (setting change flag) in step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the fact that the setting change mode has been entered in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the absence of the condition for shifting to the setting change mode). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is resumed.

The gaming machine of means O4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to the means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means includes
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change in progress flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, an error notification can be executed in the display means and an error command can be sent to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). 21TM029 can display the letter “E”),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of an operation for changing the set value (“turns on the power after the power is turned off and enters the setting change mode”). Message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the game hall, and an operation for changing the set value can be prompted.

  Also, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when power supply is stopped when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine. The invention according to the means P1 to the means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. It is to provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. And a game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) And an error notification means capable of performing error notification (the game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not established). .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that a setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, and a clear switch (setting The changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), and can be controlled to the setting change mode,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) If the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting change mode can be controlled without executing the error notification (when the power is turned on, all of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are used). Based on the determination of YES, the process proceeds to the setting change mode without proceeding to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is performed in the setting change mode without executing the error notification, and it is possible to appropriately set the setting value by avoiding unnecessary error notification. Can prompt change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, the error notification can be executed and the game can be stopped (if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not established when the power is turned on (any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). (If NO is determined in step S2), the process proceeds to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable can be limited, and appropriate game control can be realized.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means includes
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
The specific information storage means,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is transmitted in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter “E” on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of an operation for changing the set value (“turns on the power after the power is turned off and enters the setting change mode”). Message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the store clerk of the game hall, and an operation for changing the set value can be prompted.

  Also, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when power supply is stopped when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine. The invention relating to the means Q1 to the means Q5 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed There is to do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing). ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. And a game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). When it is determined that it is set, control is made to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting changeover switch) Regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is established, the setting change mode is automatically controlled to the setting change mode.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode that involves initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, the RAM based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in the steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150). You may further provide the game control microcomputer 100 which performs clear (step S21TM1410).

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means, based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control is made to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, the mode changes to the setting change mode), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. If it is remembered, control is made to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting changing flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030) ), Regardless of whether the conditions for entering the setting change mode are met or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power interruption occurs during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is entered even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it will be controlled, workability | operativity can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting changing flag is not set at power-on (NO in step S21TM4030)) Is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Is set to the setting change mode), and the setting change mode can be controlled based on the fact that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is established). Specific operation (in step S21TM4680, it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the)
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when the setting change mode is controlled (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation The setting information is erased when the setting change mode ends based on (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the setting change mode control ends)
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether the transition operation is performed or not. Control is made to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not) The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let me)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine a condition for ending the control of the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the jackpot determination random number);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (such as jackpot determination processing in the special symbol process) can be executed,
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means ends the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off). To exit the setting change mode based on
The setting value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed when the setting change mode is controlled. (The set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored in the RAM 102). The setting value stored in is changed, so even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value after the change operation is retained)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the setting value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting changing mode before the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the setting value storage means, and the setting value is changed according to the setting value. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of the jackpot determination random number);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (such as jackpot determination processing in the special symbol process) can be executed,
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). Only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored at that time in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area. To confirm the effective setting value and exit the setting change mode)
The setting value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored unless the lock switch 21TM051 is switched off even when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode. (If the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation regarding feature 038IW)
Next, the feature part 038IW will be described. First, the gaming state in this feature 038IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 038IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that tends to be a small hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this feature 038IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When controlled, when controlled to a low probability and the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), and controlled to a high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) In some cases, the control is performed with high probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

  Of the KT states, the first KT state, as will be described later, is likely to cause a small hit, but the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state. Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, control is made so that a small hit is likely to occur, and it is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is lengthened. Also, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, when the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the 2nd KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state so as to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  Further, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is likely to occur compared to the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature portion 038IW, the probability that the variable winning ball apparatus 6B will be in the open state per normal figure is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. The ratio determined to be small hit when the first special symbol fluctuates is low, whereas the ratio determined to be small hit when the second special symbol fluctuates (however, it will be described later). Therefore, the KT state is a gaming state that tends to be a small hit compared to the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to change, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  Note that the configuration for changing the KT state to a gaming state that is likely to have a smaller hit than the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the variation time of the variation pattern to be selected to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher rate of variation with respect to a certain time than the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be a gaming state in which it is easier to hit a smaller game.

  Further, the feature unit 038IW is configured such that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described in detail later, in this feature 038IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to open based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state to be described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be opened is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Therefore, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state when one game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, The game balls can be directly awarded to the variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in the feature unit 038IW. As shown in FIG. 10A, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 044IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and in the big hit gaming state, the bottom member 044IW108 is attached. When the bottom surface member 044IW108 is moved backward from the closed state where it is moved forward toward the front, the large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball won in the big prize opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

  In this feature 038IW, as shown in FIG. 10A, the game ball won in the special winning opening is further guided to a guiding path 044IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guide route 044IW100 further branches into two routes 044IW102 and 103, and the game ball guided to the guide route 044IW100 is guided to the left side route 044IW102 or the right side route 044IW103. When guided to the left path 044IW102, the game ball enters the V area 044IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 044IW106. When guided to the right path 044IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 044IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, a V-region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left-side route 044IW102. The sphere can enter the left path 044IW102 and enter the V region 044IW104. When the V area opening / closing plate 044IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided to the guidance path 044IW100 enters the right path 044IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 044IW105 to the back side of the game area.

  The V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 044IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

  In addition, in this feature unit 038IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game hits the V area 044IW104 during the big hit game and is detected by the V area switch 044IW106. Controlled to a certain change state.

  The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 044IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 044IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It is a spear. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V region switch 044IW106 and the discharge region switch 044IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In such a case, it may be configured to determine that there is a big prize entry / exit mismatch error and notify the error. In this case, it takes a certain amount of time for the game balls that have been won immediately before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is closed to reach the V area 044IW104 and the discharging area 044IW105, so the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it may be determined that it is determined that the big prize opening / discharging mismatch error.

(Configuration of control board)
FIG. 10B is a configuration diagram illustrating various control boards and the like in the feature unit 038IW. In this feature 038IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), a count switch (first count switch). 23 and the detection signal from the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 044IW106 and the discharge area switch 044IW107 are taken and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this feature 038IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the grand prize door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special prize opening, the information is transmitted to the solenoid 044IW109 for the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101.

(Big hit probability, Small hit probability)
10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among these, FIG. 10-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 10-4 has shown the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol is performed. Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in six steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in two to five steps, or the setting can be changed in seven steps or more.

  First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10A, in the non-probability variation state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest hit probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the big hit probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and in the case of the set value “6”, the big hit probability is “247/65536”. High and the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the probability variation state (high probability state), the overall winning probability is 10 times that of the non-probability variation state (low probability state). The value “1” is the lowest hit probability “2050/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the big hit probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and in the case of the set value “6”, the big hit probability is “2470/65536”. High and the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and (B), regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probable change state (low probability) Regardless of whether the state) or the probability variation state (high probability state), the small hit probability is constant as “6298/65536”. That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. Even in the case where the big hit probability is varied according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. May be configured so that the number of determination values for each setting value is matched by making the setting values different from the setting values “1” to “6”.

  Next, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the non-probability change state (low probability state), the setting value “1” is the lowest hit probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the big hit probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and in the case of the set value “6”, the big hit probability is “247/65536”. High and the most advantageous setting for the player. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the probability variation state (high probability state), the overall winning probability is 10 times that in the non-probability variation state (low probability state). The value “1” is the lowest hit probability “2050/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the big hit probability increases in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and in the case of the set value “6”, the big hit probability is “2470/65536”. High and the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, as for small hits, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and (B), regardless of the set values “1” to “6”, the non-probable change state (low probability) Regardless of whether the state is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state), the small hit probability is a constant “62986/65536”. That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3), The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of determination values for determining the small hit when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even in the case where the big hit probability is varied according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and (B), the loss probability May be configured so that the number of determination values for each setting value is matched by making the setting values different from the setting values “1” to “6”.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to the deviation are included in the determination values corresponding to all the setting values “1” to “6” (FIG. 10). -3 and FIG. 10-4, there is no set value with a loss probability of 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIG. 10-3 and FIG. 10-4, depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”). , The probability of loss is different).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a setting value that does not include a determination value corresponding to the loss). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest degree of advantage (the highest hit probability), the loss probability is 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a determination value that does not include a determination value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 10-3), it may be configured such that the small hit probability is uniformly 0 and the determination value for the small hit is not included. Good.

  10-3 (A), (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (low probability state). The probability of outliers is different, but in the probability variation state (high probability state), the small hit probability is higher than the non-probability variation state (low probability state) by the amount of increase in the big hit probability for the non-probability variation state (low probability state). The probability of loss may be made to coincide with each other. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values such as “1” and “2”, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. Accordingly, in a gaming machine having a substantive settable number of stages of less than six stages or a gaming machine having no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of gaming machine having a six-stage setting change function and a hardware / software configuration Can be made common, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the big hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol, the big hit type is set to “2R normal big hit”, “2R probability variable big hit”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine any one of “6R normal big hit”, “6R probability big hit”, or “10R probability big hit”.

  As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in this feature portion 038IW, regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The probability is determined to be “10R probability variation big hit” with a probability of 9%, “6R probability variation big hit” with a probability of 56%, and “6R normal big hit” with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in this feature portion 038IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined as “10R probability variation jackpot” with a probability of 10%, “6R probability variation jackpot” with a probability of 50%, “2R probability variation jackpot” with a probability of 5%, and “ 2R normal jackpot ".

  The “10R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 16-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The “6R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a six-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Further, the “2R probability variation big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and shifts to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends.

  The “6R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a six-round jackpot gaming state and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The “2R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and is controlled to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

  In this feature portion 038IW, when it becomes “10R probability variation big hit”, “6R probability variation big hit”, and “6R normal big hit”, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the big hit game. The big prize opening is controlled to be in an open state until a certain number (10 in this example) of game balls wins, and a maximum of 10 big prize openings can be won for each round. On the other hand, in the case of “2R probable big hit” and “2R normal big hit”, the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winning prizes that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

  Further, in this feature unit 038IW, when the big hit game is terminated, it is controlled to one of the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. How to change the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
FIGS. 10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is “small hit A” or “small hit B” based on a random number for hit type determination. ”Or“ small hit C ”is a table referred to for determination.

  As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in this feature portion 038IW, regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, “Small hit A” is determined with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), in this feature portion 038IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values “1” to “6”. Is determined as “small hit B” with a probability of 70% and “small hit C” with a probability of 30%.

  In this example, as will be described later, in the case of “small hit A”, the special prize opening is only opened for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12). You can hardly expect a game ball to enter the special prize opening. In the case of “small hit B”, the special prize opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball wins into the special prize opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of “small hit C”, the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-14), and the game ball wins into the special winning opening during the small hit game. You can expect the most.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 10-7 to FIG. 10-9 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation times) of special symbols and decorative symbols used in the feature unit 038IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is data of the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative design, and the second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative design. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 and two types of non-hit lottery variation patterns # 01 to # 02 common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the variation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09, 01 to 34, or 01 to 02) is referred to, each of the first variation pattern #n, the second variation pattern #n, and the non-hit lottery variation pattern #n is represented. means.

  When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

  When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), FIG. 10-7 (B) The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined as one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

  In this feature IW038, when the variable display of the special symbol of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started and the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the other special symbol is being executed The variable display result of the one special symbol is determined to be a display result different from the jackpot. For example, when the first special symbol change is started during the second special symbol big hit change by the process of step 038IWS57A, which will be described later, whether or not the big hit determination module is executed and the big hit determination value is stored. Regardless of whether or not it is configured to be forced off. Further, when the second special symbol change is started during the big hit change of the first special symbol by the processing of step 038IWS57B described later, whether or not the big hit determination module is executed and the big hit determination value is stored. Regardless of whether or not it is configured to be forced off.

  In the feature section IW038, when the display of the fluctuation of one special symbol is started, if the other special symbol is in the big hit fluctuation, the big hit judgment module is not executed and the big hit judgment value is stored. The jackpot determination module is not executed, but the jackpot determination module is executed (that is, the jackpot determination module is not executed). It may be configured to allow). For example, in the first special symbol normal process which will be described later, after executing step 038IWS76A, the process may move to step 038IWS64A to execute the small hit determination module.

  In the following, the big hit determination module is not executed based on the fact that the other special symbol is changing the big hit, and is forced to be dismissed (or the big hit determination module is not executed and only the small hit determination module is executed). The display is also referred to as a non-big hit lottery variation display. In the following, the jackpot determination module is not executed based on the fact that the other special symbol is fluctuating, and the display result is forcibly allowed to be other than big hits (that is, out of play (or small hits). In the case of, it is expressed that the display result is forcibly determined as non-big hit.

  When the non-hit lottery variation display is executed, if the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the non-hit lottery variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. When the variation pattern is selected and determined and is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT time shown in FIG. 10-7 (D) A variation pattern table for non-big hit lottery is selected and a variation pattern is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 10-7 (C), when the non-big hit lottery variation display is executed in the non-KT state, the non-big hit lottery variation pattern # 01 is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (D), when the non-big hit lottery variation display is executed in the KT state, the non-big hit lottery variation pattern # 02 is determined.

  In this feature IW038, when the display result is a non-hit in the KT state, when the other special symbol is forced to be a non-hit based on the fact that the big special is changing, if not (for example, In this case, the variation time is determined to be a non-hit lottery variation pattern # 02 which is extremely short as 0.5 seconds compared to the case where it is determined not to be forced but based on the big hit determination value). . With such a configuration, it is possible to determine a suitable variation pattern according to the situation, and to improve the interest.

  For example, in this feature IW038, the advantage is higher when the big win is caused by the fluctuation display of the second special symbol than when the big win is caused by the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (for example, the KT state (Or the second KT state) continues at a high rate (see FIG. 10-29). However, in such a configuration, the second special symbol is displayed as a big hit by the change display of the second special symbol, and after the big hit game, the KT state ( Or, although it is controlled to the second KT state), the suspended display of the first special symbol is executed and a normal big hit is likely to occur, and the KT state (or the second KT state) may end immediately. On the other hand, in the feature section IW038, when the second special symbol is in the big hit fluctuation in the KT state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is forcibly made a non-hit and the fluctuation time is 0. Since it becomes extremely short as 5 seconds, the digestion of the first reserved memory is accelerated. That is, the first reserved memory is completely consumed before the big special hit change of the second special symbol ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the KT state (or the second KT state) will be immediately terminated because the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is executed and is normally a big hit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4, the second special symbol process (step S25B) is executed after the first special symbol process (step S25A) is executed. Not limited to the configuration, the first special symbol process may be executed after the second special symbol process is executed. With such a configuration, when the determination value corresponding to the big hit is stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol having high advantage is executed first. The variation display of the first special symbol can be forced to be a non-hit and the game can be progressed as desired for the player.

  Also, in this feature part IW038, when the display result is a non-big hit in the non-KT state, when the other special symbol is forced to be a big hit based on the big hit fluctuation, The non-big hit lottery variation pattern # 01 is determined so as not to be determined. As will be described in detail later, when the non-big hit lottery variation pattern # 01 is determined, a special effect that suggests that the other special symbol is changing big hit (in this example, the other special symbol is It is configured to execute the moving image reproduction in the previous stage for notifying that the big hit is fluctuating (see steps 038IW924 and 038IW933). With such a configuration, a special effect can be suitably executed according to the situation, and the interest can be improved.

  For example, a left-handed operation is performed from a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) in which a right-handed operation is performed and a variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed, and a variation of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Immediately after the transition to the low probability / low base state (normal state) in which display is performed, the second reserved memory remains, and the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed based on the second reserved memory. Is assumed. In this case, the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly made a non-hit and the special effect is determined to be the non-hit lottery variation pattern # 01 and suggests that the other special symbol is changing the big hit. Will be executed. Then, the player who has confirmed the special performance knows that if he waits as it is, it will be a big hit with the second special symbol, so he can stop firing the game ball. As described above, in the feature section IW038, it is possible to realize a desirable performance control that is easy to understand for the player.

  In general, when the display result is out of place, it is determined to be a common fluctuation pattern regardless of whether the other special symbol is forcibly out of play based on the big hit fluctuation. It is configured, and such a configuration is not interesting enough. On the other hand, in this feature IW038, when the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started, whether the other special symbol is changing the big hit However, it is configured such that the ratios determined for a specific variation pattern (in this example, a non-hit lottery variation pattern) for the one special symbol variation display are different. With such a configuration, the ratio determined for a specific variation pattern (in this example, a non-hit lottery variation pattern) differs depending on the situation, so that interest can be improved.

  The feature unit 038IW is configured to select different non-hit lottery variation pattern tables for the KT state and the non-KT state, and to determine different non-hit lotion variation pattern patterns. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and a common non-hit lottery variation pattern table may be selected and determined to be a common non-hit lottery variation pattern.

  In addition, the feature unit 038IW selects a common non-hit lottery variation pattern table for the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although it is configured to be determined as a big hit lottery variation pattern, it is not limited to such a configuration, a dedicated non-big hit lottery variation pattern table provided respectively is selected, and a dedicated non-big hit lottery variation pattern is selected It may be configured to be determined. For example, the variation pattern for non-hit lottery determined when the second special symbol is changing big hit and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is forced to be non-hit, and the first special symbol is changed to big hit It is also possible to provide a non-big hit lottery variation pattern determined when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forced to be non-big hit.

  In addition, the feature unit 038IW is configured to determine one variation pattern with respect to the non-big hit lottery variation display. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. It may be provided and determined by lottery. In this case, an effect (for example, a special effect) corresponding to a plurality of types of non-big hit lottery variation patterns may be executable.

  Also, in this feature unit 038IW, when the other special symbol is forced to shift based on the big hit fluctuation, it is determined to be a specific fluctuation pattern (in this example, a non-hit lottery fluctuation pattern). For example, even when the other special symbol is in a big hit fluctuation, the small hit determination module is executed, and if the configuration is allowed to be a small hit, If the special symbol of is a big hit fluctuation, even if it is not forced out of play (that is, even if it is a small hit), it is determined to a specific fluctuation pattern (in this example, a non-hit lottery fluctuation pattern) You may comprise.

  Also, in this feature part 038IW, when the other special symbol is in a big hit fluctuation, it is not forcibly made a non-big hit (for example, it is determined not to be forcibly but based on a big hit judgment value) In this case, a specific variation pattern (in this example, a non-hit lottery variation pattern) is not determined, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be determined. However, it is desirable that the ratio to be determined is lower than when the other special symbol is forced to be a non-hit based on the fact that the big hit is fluctuating.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, in the case of the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C). A table is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of place, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the big hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of time of 5 minutes.

  In this feature portion 038IW, even when in the non-KT state, when the second special symbol variation display is executed and a small hit is made, a situation where a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game balls to the special prize opening occurs. End up. Therefore, in this feature 038IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is extremely lengthened and the variation display execution frequency is increased. In this case, the occurrence frequency of the small hits is reduced to prevent the situation where the player is targeted to acquire the winning ball by the small hits even in the non-KT state. In the feature unit 038IW, the “occurrence frequency per unit time” is, for example, an occurrence rate per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, a small amount per unit time. The occurrence rate of is higher than the normal state.

  In this feature 038IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the length of 5 minutes relatively long, it is possible to prevent an act of unjustly aiming for a winning ball by winning a special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of small hit, so it is configured to have a shorter variation time than the case of big hit. Yes.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations after that. In this case, if the change display of the first change is executed, the second special symbol change pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first change shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) is selected and changed. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06 is performed. To be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state is out of place, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is made as the first fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. Variation pattern for preparation). As already described, in the feature unit 038IW, when the first KT state is controlled, the special winning prize is actually increased by increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B although the frequency of the small hits is increased. The special prize opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls have accumulated on the bottom members of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball immediately. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win a special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 038IW, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds for the first variation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 are changed before the transition to the first KT state. By allowing the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 to be in an open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all of the game balls accumulated on the bottom member have fallen, This prevents a situation in which more than expected prize balls can be obtained in the 1KT state. In addition, when the big hit is determined as the first change in the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 06 is determined, and the change display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

  Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations after ending the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the second to 49th variation shown in E) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 07 to # 13 Decide on either. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of place, the second fluctuation pattern # having a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 08 may be determined to be 07 or a shortened variation having a variation time as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state is a deviation, the second variation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. In addition, when the small hit is determined as the second to 49th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortening fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the fluctuation time is further shorter to 1 second. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 11 of the shortening variation is determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored. The second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 include one or more second reserved memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when Thereby, it is set as the structure which accelerates | stimulates reservation memory and raises an operation rate. Further, when the big hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be the second variation pattern # 13 with reach.

  In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of the 50th fluctuation (that is, the low fluctuation / final fluctuation in the first KT state) is executed. If so, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16 To be determined.

  In the feature portion 038IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th change in the low probability / first KT state is a loss or a small hit, a character display such as “Chance Time End!” Is displayed on the image display device 5. Are determined to be the second variation pattern # 14 and the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by an end display. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “Chance time end!”. After the end display to be performed, the second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined restoration display is determined.

  In this feature 038IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when the first special symbol change display is a big hit during the KT state, the first change pattern # 07 with a change time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case in which a big hit immediately occurs in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol is a long fluctuation time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be forcibly disengaged, the forcible disengagement frequently occurs in spite of the second KT state, and the player hits the small hit You will not receive any profits. For this reason, in this feature 038IW, the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol is set to a short variation time so as to shift to the big hit gaming state based on the variation of the first special symbol before the forced disengagement frequently occurs. It is configured.

  Unlike the feature 038IW, even when the second special symbol starts to change during the big hit change of the first special symbol, the second special symbol is not forced to deviate (for example, the first special symbol) If the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped, the gaming time of the first special symbol jackpot variation time in the KT state is a gaming machine with a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed. May be a long variation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case in which a big hit is immediately generated by the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state. You will not receive any profits from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time at which small hits can occur at least several times. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation after the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of times. In this case, if the change display of the first change is executed, the second special symbol change pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first change shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected and changed. A pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21 To be determined.

  Similar to the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), the variation time is also determined when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of place. There are cases where the second variation pattern # 17 having a short variation of 5 seconds is determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is a deviation, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 18 with reach. Also, even when it is determined that a small hit is made as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing the second start winning opening may be determined (second variation pattern # 19). On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the big hit is determined as the first change in the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

  Also, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after ending the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state, the high rate shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern table for probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent variations is selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28 is performed. It is decided.

  Similarly to the 2nd to 49th variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when it is determined that there is a deviation from the 2nd variation in the high probability / first KT state, There are cases where the second fluctuation pattern # 22 with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time as short as 5 seconds or the second fluctuation pattern # 23 with a short fluctuation with a fluctuation time as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation from the second change of the high probability / first KT state, it may be determined to be the second change pattern # 24 with reach. In addition, when a small hit is determined after the second change of the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 25 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or the short fluctuation time of one second is further shortened. There are cases where the second variation pattern # 26 of variation is determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined after the second change of the high probability / first KT state, the change may be determined to the second change pattern # 27 with reach. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored. The second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 include one or more second reserved memories stored. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when Thereby, it is set as the structure which accelerates | stimulates reservation memory and raises an operation rate. Further, when the big hit is determined after the second change of the high probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the high probability / second KT state is set, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined by selection. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined as one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. .

  As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when it is determined that there is a high probability / displacement in the second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 29 with a short variation of 1.5 seconds. In some cases, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 30 having a normal variation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when determining a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, when the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 having a short variation of 1.5 seconds, or when the variation time is 5 seconds There are cases where the second variation pattern # 33 of variation is determined. Further, in the case of determining a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be the second variation pattern # 34 with reach.

  When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed, the current gaming state, and the variable display result Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for variation pattern determination to determine which variation pattern is to be used. FIG. 10-10 is a diagram for determining a variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for small hits.

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature 038IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, Regardless of the set value “1” to “6”, the second variation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70% and the second variation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in the present example, in the second KT state, there is a high probability that a variation pattern of a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

  In addition, in FIG. 10-10, although the fluctuation pattern table in the case of performing the small hit change of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown as an example, FIG. 10-7 to FIG. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6”.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is high in the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the case of a low probability state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in a case of a high probability state.

  Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 will be described. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7. FIG. First, using FIG. 10-11 (1), a special variable winning ball when controlled to a big hit game based on a 10R positive change big hit, a 6R positive change big hit, and a 2R positive change big hit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “probable big hit”). The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (large prize winning opening) is in the open state. Controlled. Then, when a game ball wins during the opening of the big winning opening, the first count switch 23 detects it.

  Also, in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the second game ball winning in the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 044IW109 is driven and V The area opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to be in an open state, and a game ball can enter the V area 044IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses in the first round or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is detected, as shown in FIG. When the variable winning ball apparatus 7 (large winning opening) is again controlled to be closed, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

  When a game ball enters the V area 044IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 044IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the gaming state is controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the big hit game based on the probable big hit, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to be opened, and the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is The period is a period until a predetermined period (in this example, 500 ms) elapses after the closed state is controlled again.

  Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in the case of being controlled by the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “normal big hit”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 (large prize winning opening) is in the open state. To be controlled. Then, when a game ball wins during the opening of the big winning opening, the first count switch 23 detects it.

  Also, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first game ball winning in the first round is detected in the first round, the solenoid 044IW109 is driven and V The area opening / closing plate 044IW101 is controlled to be in an open state for a very short period (in this example, 0.02 seconds). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses in the first round or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is detected, as shown in FIG. The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is again controlled to be closed, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the predetermined detection valid period is after a very short open period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101, It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the open period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is long. Therefore, it is easy for a game ball to enter the V region 044IW104 during a predetermined detection valid period, and it is easy to be controlled to a certain change state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the open period of the V region opening / closing plate 044IW101 is extremely short. For this reason, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the V region 044IW 104 substantially during a predetermined detection valid period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. Accordingly, in this example, in the big hit game based on the probability big hit, the game ball enters the V region 044IW 104 at a higher rate during the big hit game than in the big hit game based on the normal big hit.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. 10-12 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 when the small hit is A. FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 when the small hit B is achieved. FIG. 10-14 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 when the small hit C is obtained. FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12 (2). FIGS. 10-14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

  First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 When the symbol change display is executed and the normal symbol is determined to be per unit, the normal symbol display unit 20 derives and displays the hit symbol, and when it is determined to be off, the normal symbol display unit 20 displays the out symbol. Is done. In this feature 038IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol is displayed. The time is 0.2 seconds. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 second has elapsed, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won at the second start winning opening.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, when the small hit symbol is A, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A) Since the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball apparatus 6B is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although it is a state where a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball wins a special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation displays).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After the elapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the next normal symbol variation time of 0.2 seconds, symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning port opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds. is there. Therefore, in the feature portion 038IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened.

  Further, in the feature unit 038IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol variation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening release pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds, The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is Since the time until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is shorter, the variable winning ball device 6B has already been opened. When being controlled to the state, the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 without changing the normal symbol is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 When the symbol change display is executed and the normal symbol is determined to be per unit, the normal symbol display unit 20 derives and displays the hit symbol, and when it is determined to be off, the normal symbol display unit 20 displays the out symbol. Is done. In this feature 038IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the winning symbol and the off symbol The time is 0.2 seconds. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), after the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second start winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won at the second start winning opening.

  If a game ball wins the second start winning opening when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, if the small hit is A, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is kept open for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (2), the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is as extremely short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in this feature portion 038IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 seconds + design fixed time 0) as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened. A relatively long period of 2 seconds + 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening process is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Compared to the first KT state, the game balls are likely to enter the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 on the downstream side, and the game balls are likely to win the special prize opening. However, in the case of a small hit A, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so that even if it is in the second KT state, it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, a game ball is likely to win a special winning opening, and it is easy to obtain a winning ball. In this example, this is also referred to as “small hit RUSH”. In the second KT state, “small hit RUSH” "" Is displayed.

  Further, in this example, the case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 (special winning opening) is changed depending on which of the small hit types A to C is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 may be configured to be opened differently depending on which of the small hit types A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball apparatus 17 may be configured to open 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 (special winning opening) is executed by performing the opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 for 0.4 seconds four times. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type that allows a game ball to win to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the case where there are three types of small hit types A to C is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and, for example, four or more types of small hit types are provided. Also good.

  Further, in the feature unit 038IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. After 3.8 seconds, which is the total of the normal symbol variation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning port opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled. Therefore, in the second KT state, a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 without a normal symbol variation is less likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

  In the feature unit 038IW, the normal symbol process processing is executed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) to execute the normal symbol variation display or to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B. This is performed by executing (see step S26). In addition, in the normal symbol process of step S26, the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, whether or not to hit the usual figure is determined with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

  In this feature 038IW, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same in 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening releasing process is The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown. I can't. For example, you may comprise so that the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may differ by varying the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. By doing so, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be varied. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any one of the methods described above, it is possible to suppress winning in the special winning opening in the first KT state. .

  In this feature 038IW, as will be described later, in the first KT state, the high base state is set by setting a high base flag indicating the high base state, whereby FIGS. As shown in 10-14 (1), control is performed so that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B becomes longer. In the second KT state, the variable baseball apparatus 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. Control is done to shorten the time.

  For example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIG. 10-12 (1) to FIG. When the variable winning ball apparatus 6B as shown in FIG. 14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and the special flag is not set, FIG. 10-12 (2) to FIG. 10-14. You may comprise so that the variable winning ball apparatus 6B shown to (2) may be controlled by the 2nd opening pattern (short opening) which opens for a short time. In other words, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and control may be performed so that the special flag is not set in other states including the big hit gaming state.

  Even in the first KT state, when the last change display in the low probability / first KT state is executed, the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be shortened. For example, the special flag may be erased in response to the 49th special symbol fluctuation stop in the 50th special symbol shortened fluctuation period in the low probability / first KT state. With such a configuration, when a left-handed notification is made after the low probability / first KT state ends, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open. be able to.

  As described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening variation of the special symbol variation display is further used. The special symbol variation display may be controlled, and in this case, the special flag and the shortening variation flag may be separately managed and controlled.

  Further, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. Then, it is possible to prevent winning in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In this feature 038IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the variation display of the second special symbol with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state where the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped and the ordinary symbol is not stored This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture the timing of the second special symbol variation stop (when passing the small symbol, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the pass gate The variable winning ball device 6B is not released until the game ball that has passed 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and a special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature portion 038IW, the variable symbol ball device 6B is opened before the game ball reaches the variable ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 by shortening the normal symbol variation time. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a capture element due to a launch operation aiming at a small hit occurrence timing based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

  FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), and 8033 (H) to 8034 (H) correspond to the variable display of special symbols. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative design variably displayed on the image display device 5. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Accordingly, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H), 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), and 8033 (H) to 8034 (H), the image display device 5 Control to start variable display of decorative symbols. In this feature 038IW, when the command 8033 (H) for designating the non-hit lottery variation pattern # 01 is received, the image display device 5 performs a special effect to reproduce the moving image and variably displays the decorative symbols. Is controlled not to execute.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (outgoing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is to be lost. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 10R probability variation big hit. . Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. . Command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. . Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. . Command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as display result designation commands. In the feature unit 038IW, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command. Therefore, the display result designation command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result designation command is for the first special symbol and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result designation command for the second special symbol, the display result Although the designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol may be different from the display result designation command for the second special symbol.

  Also, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation big hit / 6R probability variation big hit / 6R normal variation big hit / 2R normal variation big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / displacement. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the production control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is finished. Command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that lighting of the right-handed display 26 has started.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of variable display of the second special symbol.

  Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = any hexadecimal number) is an effect control command that is sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot start designation command: a fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (hit end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the big hit game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the start of a small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big prize opening) that designates display during the round during the big hit game. Note that the number of rounds displayed in “XX” is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big prize opening) that specifies display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

  Command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a big winning opening. Command B 401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached four. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning designation command) indicating that a game ball has won a second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached four. A command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first effective start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second effective starting winning designation command. The first valid start winning designation command and the second valid start winning designation command are commands indicating that there has been a start winning.

  Command C 801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  Command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that the first customer is waiting (the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). (Wait demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that the second customer is waiting (the second special symbol is not changed and the second reserved memory is not stored). (Wait demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / first KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / first KT state. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is high probability / second KT state.

  The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) that specifies a setting value that is currently set. A setting value is set in “XX”. For example, when the set value “1” is set, the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. For example, when the setting value “6” is set, the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the setting value command.

  When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, FIG. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 10-15 and FIGS. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed presentation control command relating to the big hit game and a presentation control command indicating a gaming state (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

  FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Note that the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state where the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 038 IWS50A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passing waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and is not a big hit game (special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small hit game (special variable winning ball device 17 is open). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved memory number (step 038IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is confirmed. If the first reserved memory number is 0, a first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038 IWS 52A).

  If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the gaming control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 and reads the RAM 102. In the first random number buffer area (step 038IWS53A), the value of the first reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the first reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 038IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is expressed as the first reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are: The order of extraction is also stored in an identifiable manner.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 038IWS55A). In this example, the process of step 038 IWS55A is executed, so that a set value command is transmitted every time a variable display is started. However, a setting change process (a process for changing a set value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when the is executed.

  Note that the timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the set value command is transmitted at the end of the variable display, or the set value command is transmitted during the variable display. It may be configured to do so.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038 IWS 56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the low probability / non-KT state is present, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability / first KT state is determined and the low probability / first KT background designation command is determined. When the probability variation flag is ON and the high base flag is ON, the high probability / first KT state is determined. If the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off, it is determined that the probability is high / second KT state and the high probability / second KT background designation command is Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the second special symbol jackpot change is in progress (step 038IWS57A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big special hit of the second special symbol is being changed. If it is determined that the second special symbol is in the big hit variation, the non-hit lottery flag indicating that the non-big hit lottery variation display is set without performing the processing after step 038IWS58A (step 038IWS76A), step Move to 038IWS69A. Thereby, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when a big hit of the second special symbol is changing at step 038IWS57A, a random value (fixed value) is set as a random number for hit determination, and the process proceeds to step 038IWS59A, so that at the time of starting winning Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

  Also, for example, when the big special symbol variation of the second special symbol is in progress at step 038IWS57A, the processing of steps 038IWS58A to S63A is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) that is out of place is set as the random number for hit determination. By making a hit determination, it may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of starting winning.

  If the second special symbol jackpot change is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 038IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 038IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a big hit is made when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 038IWS60A), the gaming control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol (step 038IWS61A). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit or 6R normal big hit (step 038IWS62A), the big hit type is stored (step 038IWS63A), and step 038IWS69A. Migrate to

  If the big hit is not made in step 038IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 038IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 038IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol ( Step 038 IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the hit type determination random number (step 038IWS67A) and stores the small hit type (step 038IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined as the small hit type A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS 69A.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is “0” (step 038IWS69A), and if it is “0”, step 038IWS75A. Migrate to When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 038 IWS 70 A), It is determined whether or not “0” has been reached (step 038 IWS71A). When the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 038 IWS72A) and shortens the special symbol variation display. The special time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 038 IWS73A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a state extension flag indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 038 IWS 74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS75A.

  In this feature unit 038IW, as described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed at a low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / This is a case where 50 times of variable display is executed under the control of the high base state (low probability / first KT state). In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when starting the 50th variation display, it is determined as Y in steps 038IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 038IWS72A and S72B. In addition to being reset, the special time flag is also reset in steps 038IWS73A and S73B, and a transition is made to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

  The state extension flag is used to continue the right-handed notification and continue the right-handed state. As the gaming state, although the high base state has ended, the state is shortened in common with the first KT state, It is a flag for making a production background common to the 1KT state.

  In step 038IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 038IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 038IWS75A is determined.

  In step 038IWS59A, whether or not to win is determined using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

  FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the non-hit lottery flag is set (step 044IWS1701A). When the non-hit lottery flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the non-hit lottery flag (step 044IWS1704A) and selects a variation pattern table for non-hit lottery variation display (step 044IWS1705A). . In step 044IWS 1705A, when it is in the non-KT state, the non-hit lottery variation pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (C) is selected as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, and the KT state Is selected, the non-big hit lottery variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (D) is selected.

  When the non-hit lottery flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the special symbol time reduction flag indicating that the special symbol variation display is being shortened is set ( Step 044 IWS1701A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the control for shortening the special symbol variable display (FIG. 10-7). ~ See FIG. 10-9), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-shown pattern shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 044IWS1702A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 044IWS1703A).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 044IWS1702A, S1703A, and S1705A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is to be used (step 044 IWS 1706A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038 IWS 1707A).

  Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 044IWS 1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer, and the variation time. Is started (step 038IWS1708A), and the first special symbol display device 4A is started to display the variation of the first special symbol (step 038IWS1709A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 038 IWS1710A).

  FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart of the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 038IWS1120A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passing waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and is not a big hit game (special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small hit game (special variable winning ball device 17 is open). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the type of the big hit type. Based on the determination result, any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. In response to this, the transmission control is performed (step 038 IWS1121A).

  Next, the CPU 103 decrements the first variation time timer by 1 (step 038IWS1122A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 038IWS1123A), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 038 IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 038IWS1130A).

  If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 038IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 038IWS1125) or if the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 038IWS1126A), the CPU 103 performs the CPU 120 for effect control. The control for transmitting the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 038IWS1129A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 038IWS1130A).

  When the processing of steps 038IWS1125A and S1126A is executed, in this feature 038IW, if the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol The change display is forcibly stopped so that a big hit or a small hit does not occur simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly discontinued, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 038IWS1124A. As a result, control is performed to forcibly discontinue and display the symbols.

  If neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (N in step 038IWS1125A, N in step 038IWS1126A), the processing is ended as it is.

  FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the state extension flag is set (step 038 IWS2010A). If the state extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the state extension flag that has been set (step 038 IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 038IWS2012A) and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038IWS2013A).

  In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) is provided on the right side of the gaming area, when the gaming state is controlled to the KT state, the player who performed the right-handed operation Is advantageous to the player and the right handed indicator 26 is lit. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but the process of steps 038IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B is executed, so that the 50th variation display is performed. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is ended to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the process of steps 038 IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. The right-handed display 26 is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays a stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 038IWS2014A). In this case, if the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has been transmitted in step 038IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation process, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. In essence, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 038 IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot is started (step 038 IWS2016A). In addition, the CPU 103 clears the first big hit flag (step 038 IWS2017A).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control for starting lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 038IWS2018A) and performs control for transmitting a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS2027A.

  By executing the processing of steps 038 IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is started when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, the right hit is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. You may comprise so that lighting of the indicator 26 may be started.

  When the first big hit flag is not set (N in Step 038IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (Step 038IWS2020A). When the 1st small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation | designated command with respect to CPU120 for presentation control is performed (step 038IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 038 IWS 2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 038 IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS2027A.

  In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when the winning combination is the small hit in the first special symbol variation display, there is only the case where the small hit type is the small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. For this reason, in this example, when the first special symbol variation display is a small hit, the right-handed indicator 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step 038 IWS2027A).

  In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, a right-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. Yes. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, it is configured to be able to execute a launch promotion notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 as a right-handed notification. It may be.

  Also, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the second special symbol, the right-handed notification and the firing promotion notification are not executed, and when the game ball is won in the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification and the firing promotion notification are performed. (In this case, since it is in the state of waiting for the gate to pass, even if a game ball wins the first start winning opening, the first special symbol does not start to be displayed immediately, and the first reserved memory is stored.) You may comprise.

  Conversely, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, a sound output with a small volume or a small screen display). Thus, a left-handed notification that prompts the player to launch a game ball to the left of the game area may be performed. On the other hand, when a game ball winning in the second start winning opening or special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), a mode with a high recognition degree (for example, a sound output of a large volume or A left-handed notification may be performed by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the configuration described above, a player who accidentally fires a game ball to the right of the game area performs a light left-hand notification with a low recognition degree to the surroundings of the gaming machine. A player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation may be configured to perform a left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high. If comprised in that way, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged to return to the left-handed operation from the store clerk of the game store.

  Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second start winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. The passing gate 41 gives a left-handed notification when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), and the second start winning opening or special winning opening has a predetermined number. Alternatively, a left-handed notification may be performed when a small number of game balls (for example, one) are detected.

  The feature unit 038IW displays a demo when a specific condition is satisfied. However, when the demo display is performed in a normal state, the pass gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be terminated and left-handed notification may be performed.

  FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process. The case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal process is a state where the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

  In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120). It is confirmed whether or not (step 038 IWS50B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passing waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and is not a big hit game (special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small hit game (special variable winning ball device 17 is open). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved memory number (step 038IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed. If the second reserved memory number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038IWS52B).

  If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the gaming control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 and reads the RAM 102. In the second random number buffer area (step 038IWS53B), the value of the second reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 038IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 is expressed as the second reserved memory number = n−. 1 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved memory numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like that. That is, in this example, every time the variable display start condition is satisfied, the contents of each storage area are shifted, so the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 038IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 038 IWS55B, the set value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started. However, the setting change process (process for changing the set value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when the is executed.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038 IWS 56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 038IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 038IWS57B). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed. If it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the non-hit lottery flag indicating that the non-hit lottery change display is set without performing the processing after step 038IWS58B (step 038IWS76B). Move to 038IWS69B. Thereby, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly deviate regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

  Note that the method of forcibly removing is not limited to that described above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing at step 038IWS57B, a process of setting a random value (fixed value) out of place as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 038IWS59B, so that Regardless of whether or not the winning hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

  Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing at step 038IWS57B, the processing of steps 038IWS58B to S63B is not performed, and a random number value (fixed value) that is out of place is set as a random number for hit determination. By making a hit determination, it may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which hit determination random number was acquired at the time of starting winning.

  When the big hit of the first special symbol is not fluctuating, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit judgment random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 038IWS58B) and executes the jackpot judgment module (step 038IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a big hit is made when the hit determination random number matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is decided to win (step 038IWS60B), the gaming control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that it is a big win based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 038IWS61B). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is 10R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, or 2R normal big hit (step 038IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 038IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 038IWS69B.

  If the big hit is not made in step 038IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 038IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines a small hit when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 038IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol ( Step 038 IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the hit type determination random number (step 038IWS67B) and stores the small hit type (step 038IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined as small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 038IWS69B.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is “0” (step 038IWS69B), and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step 038IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter is not “0”, that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 subtracts “1” from the value of the high base number counter (step 038 IWS 70 B), It is determined whether or not “0” has been reached (step 038 IWS 71 B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become “0”, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating the high base state (step 038 IWS72B) and shortens the special symbol variation display. The special time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 038IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a state extension flag (step 038IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS75B.

  In step 038IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 038IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 038 IWS75B.

  In step 038IWS59B, whether or not to win is determined using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

  The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) illustrated in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if “first” is read as “second”, the second variation pattern process has been described. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 performs the same process as in step 044IWS1701A, and checks whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-shown pattern shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The second special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected. If the special time flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the gaming control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether or not the probability change flag and the high base flag are set and the number of changes. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any one of the second special symbol variation pattern tables for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (if low probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. If the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (E) is selected, and if the 50th variation, the second variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected. Select a special pattern variation pattern table. Also, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), if the first variation, the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) A pattern table is selected, and if it is after the second variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Also, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

  FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 038IWS1120B). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passing waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. This is a case where the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and is not a big hit game (special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small hit game (special variable winning ball device 17 is open). is there.

  If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the type of the big hit type. Any display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) based on the determination result Is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038IWS1121B).

  Next, the CPU 103 decrements the second variation time timer by 1 (step 038IWS1122B), and when the second variation time timer times out (step 038IWS1123B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU120 ( Step 038 IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 038IWS1130B).

  If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 038IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, The determination can be made by checking whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set.

  If the first special symbol display device 4A has not derived and displayed the big hit symbol, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A has derived and displayed the small bonus symbol (step 038IWS1126B). Whether or not the small special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. The determination can be made by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is set. If the small special symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the process is terminated.

  When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 038IWS1125B) or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 038IWS1126B), the CPU 103 causes the CPU 120 for effect control to 2. Control to transmit a forced symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 038IWS1129B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 038IWS1130B).

  By executing the processing of steps 038IWS1125B and S1126B, in this feature 038IW, if the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol The change display is forcibly stopped so that a big hit or a small hit does not occur simultaneously in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, when the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly discontinued, the variation display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 038IWS1124B. As a result, control is performed to forcibly discontinue and display the symbols.

  If neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 038IWS1125B, N in step 038IWS1126B), the processing is ended as it is.

  FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the state extension flag is set (step 038 IWS2010B). If the state extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the state extension flag that has been set (step 038 IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 038IWS2012B) and performs control to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038IWS2013B).

  Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays a stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 038IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been transmitted in step 038IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, it is compulsory as a stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of variation. In essence, the out-of-order symbol is derived and displayed.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (step 038 IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag (step 038 IWS2016B). In addition, the CPU 103 clears the second big hit flag (step 038 IWS2017B).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control for starting lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 038IWS2018B) and performs control for transmitting a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 038IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS2027B.

  By executing the processing of steps 038 IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, lighting of the right-handed display 26 is started when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

  When the second big hit flag is not set (N in Step 038IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second big hit flag is set (Step 038IWS2020B). When the 2nd small hit flag is set, control which transmits the small hit start designation command with respect to production control CPU120 is performed (step 038IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 038 IWS 2022B).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 038 IWS2023B). If the special time flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control for starting lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 038 IWS2024B), and at the same time with respect to the effect control CPU 120 Control is performed to transmit a strike lighting start designation command (step 038 IWS2025B).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 038IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS2027B.

  By executing the processing of steps 038IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on when a small hit is obtained in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is lit.

  However, in this example, even if it is a small hit in the variation display of the second special symbol, when the KT state is in effect, the right-handed indicator 26 is already on. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process in step 038IWS2023B, the right-handed indicator 26 starts to be lit in duplicate when the small special hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the KT state. Or sending a right-handed lighting start designation command.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 038 IWS2027B).

  FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing the accessory control normal process (step S120) in the accessory control process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit start flag is set (step 044IWS2101). If the big hit start flag is not set, the process is terminated.

  If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 044IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a pre-winner opening timer (step 044IWS2103), sets round 1 release pattern data corresponding to the jackpot type (step 044IWS2104), and sets “1” in the round counter indicating the number of jackpot rounds. ”Is set (step 044 IWS 2105).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 044 IWS 2106).

  FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart illustrating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 044IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is not input, the processing is terminated as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the special time flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 if it is set ( Step 044 IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 044IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (step 044IWS2504).

  In this feature portion 038IW, when the gate pass waiting process is executed, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the pass gate 41 is played. On the condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21, it is configured to shift to a big hit game.

  FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart illustrating the big hit release process (step S123) in the accessory control process. In the big hit release processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in an ON state (step 044IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the on state, that is, if a game ball won in the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 counts the number of winning balls for counting the number of game balls won in the big prize opening. The counter value is incremented by 1 (step 044IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a special winning opening prize designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 044IWS2403).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V region switch 044IW106 is in an ON state (step 044IWS2404). If the V area switch 044IW106 is in an ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 044IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that a game ball has entered the V area 044IW104. (Step 044 IWS 2405).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 044 IWS 2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 044IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the opening time timer value for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step 044IWS2407), and the opening time timer after subtraction has timed out. (Step 044IWS2408). If the release time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated.

  When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 044IWS2406) or when the open time timer has timed out (Y in step 044IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Stop and control the special winning opening to the closed state (step 044IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display command after opening the special winning opening to the CPU 120 for effect control (step 044IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 044IWS2411).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit release post-processing (step 044IWS2412).

  FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 044IWS2200). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 044IWS2202. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 (the big hit end display time). A value is set (step 044IWS2201), and the process ends.

  In step 044IWS2202, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer (step 044IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 044IWS2203). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS2203), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 044IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 044IWS2205), sets the probability variation flag, and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 044IWS2206).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has been completed this time is 10R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot (step 044IWS2207). Whether or not the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 038IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 038IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If it is 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the special time flag and shifts to the KT state (step 044IWS2208). Then, control goes to a step 044IWS2215. In the case of 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / low base state (high Probability / second KT state).

  If neither the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot is found, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has been completed this time is the 6R probability variation jackpot (step 044IWS2209). Whether or not it is 6R probability variation big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the big hit type stored in step 038IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process or step 038IWS63B of the second special symbol normal process. If the 6R probability variable big hit, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 044IWS2210), and further sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 044IWS2211). Then, control goes to a step 044IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of 6R probability variable big hit, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled.

  In the case of 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 044IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains zero. Therefore, after the big hit game based on the 6R probability variable big hit, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled, and the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. In step 038IWS69A of the first special symbol normal process or step 038IWS69B of the second special symbol normal process, it is determined as Y, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter in step 038IWS70A or step 038IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If it is not 6R probability big hit (that is, if it is 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 044IWS2212), and sets the special time reduction flag. To the KT state (step 044IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 044 IWS2214). Then, control goes to a step 044IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 044IWS2215).

  FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing the small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 044IWS2300). If the small hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 044IWS2302. When the small hitting end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays in the small hitting end display timer a display corresponding to the time during which the small hitting end display is performed in the image display device 5 (small hitting end display time). A value corresponding to time is set (step 044IWS2301), and the process ends.

  In step 044IWS2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the small hit end display timer (step 044IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 044IWS2303). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 044IWS2304). If the special time flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the right-handed display 26 is being lit (step 044 IWS 2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 044IWS2306) and transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 044IWS2307).

  In this example, when the change display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on at the start of the small hit game (steps 038IWS2023B to S2025B). Reference), the processing of steps 044IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is ended at the end of the small hit game.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 044 IWS 2308).

  Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 038IW will be described. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the gaming state transitions in the feature unit 038IW. First, in this feature 038IW, in a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming to the left of the game area. For this reason, in the normal state, a start winning is mainly generated at the first starting winning opening, and a variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, a 10R positive change big hit, a 6R positive change big hit, or a 6R normal big hit occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability / A transition is made to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 044IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / The first KT state is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 044 IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. Also, if 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game is finished, shift to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and whether the next big hit will occur The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50-time variation display is completed (see steps 044IWS 2212 to S2214).

  In this feature 038IW, when the player has moved to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the player aims at the right side of the game area. The game ball is fired (right-handed). For this reason, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated at the second starting winning opening, and a variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R positive change big hit, a 6R positive change big hit, a 2R positive change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability change big hit or 2R probability change big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 044 IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during a big hit game, a high probability is given after the big hit game is finished. / Transition to the high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 044 IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In this feature 038IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the total probability of 6R probability variation is 50% (see FIG. 10-5). When the base state is reached, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), after the big hit game is over, a transition is made to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the display of 50 fluctuations is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

  As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability change big hit or 2R probability change big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 044 IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability after the big hit game ends. / Transition to the high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 044 IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), the transition to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) occurs after the big hit game ends. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the display of 50 fluctuations is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214). In this feature portion 038IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of 2R normal big hit is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit and 2R normal big hit are generated and the low probability / high base state is reached, the next big hit is not generated, and the 50-time variation display is completed, FIG. As shown, the low-probability / low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered (see steps 038 IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

  As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability change big hit or 2R probability change big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game Then, after the jackpot game is over, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 044 IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In this feature 038IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of the 10R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit is 15. % (See FIGS. 10-5D and 10E), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, a high probability is obtained after the big hit game is finished. / Transition to the high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 044 IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability state may not be controlled. In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), after the big hit game ends, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state). The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the display of 50 fluctuations is completed (see steps 044IWS2212 to S2214).

  In FIG. 10-29, the case where the first special symbol variation display is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is explained, but the second special symbol variation is performed at a low rate. There is also a possibility that the display is executed. In this case, if a 10R probability variation big hit or a 2R probability variation big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the game moves to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of fluctuation display ends. The base state will be maintained.

  In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW 104 during the big hit game, the game moves to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished. The base state will be maintained.

  Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW 104 during the big hit game, the game moves to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished. The base state will be maintained.

  In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW 104 during the big hit game, the game moves to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). In addition, when a 6R probability variable big hit occurs, if a game ball enters the V region 044IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, the state shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50-time variation display is finished. The base state will be maintained.

  Next, the normal symbol process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the normal symbol process. In the normal symbol process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step 044IWS5111). Control to transmit a gate passage designation command to the CPU 120 for effect control is performed (step 044IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes a gate switch passage process (step 044IWS5113).

  In this feature portion 038IW, when the processing of steps 044IWS 5111 to S5113 is executed, and the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature part 038IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also serves as an operating area. Is the gate passing waiting state before the big hit game is started after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed? Regardless of whether or not, a gate passage designation command is transmitted.

  Then, CPU 103 executes any one of the processes shown in steps 044IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  In this feature 038IW, regardless of whether or not it is in a gate passage waiting state, if it is detected in step 044IWS5111 that a game ball has passed to the passage gate 41, the gate switch passage processing in step 044IWS5113 is executed. Normally, variable display of symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the normal symbol change display is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when not waiting for the gate to pass, and the normal symbol is displayed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing waiting state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display.

  Further, in this feature portion 038IW, the passing gate 41 is used as a gate for both the normal start area and the operating area, but the special symbol process (see steps S25A and S25B) is normal in the timer interrupt process. Since the process is executed prior to the symbol process (see step S26), the passage of the game ball of the pass gate 41 as the normal start area is performed after the process of detecting the pass of the game ball of the pass gate 41 as the operation area is performed. A detection process is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

  Gate switch passage processing (step 044IWS5113): The CPU 103 determines that the count value (gate passage storage number) of the gate passage storage counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, “ 4)) is confirmed. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. Note that the LED of the general-purpose hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs processing for extracting the value of the random number for determination per ordinary symbol and storing it in the storage area (ordinary symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passages through the gate.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100): The CPU 103 is in a state where normal symbol variation can be started (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 044IWS5100, specifically, the normal symbol) When the display 20 does not display the change of the normal symbol and when the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is not in the open / close operation based on the normal symbol display 20 being hit and displayed, the gate pass memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not to stop the normal symbol as a winning symbol). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 044 IWS 5101).

  Normal symbol variation processing (step 044IWS5101): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step 044 IWS 5102).

  Normal symbol stop process (step 044IWS 5102): The CPU 103 checks whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, checks whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a missing symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the time before the normal electric accessory is released is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 044 IWS 5103).

  Normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 044IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal electric component operating time in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer Is started, and opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “4”) indicating the normal electric accessory operation processing (step 044IWS5104).

  Normal electric accessory operation processing (step 044IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 044IWS5100).

  FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal process (step 044IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 044IWS5121). If the gate passing memory number is 0 (Y in step 044IWS5121), the process is terminated as it is. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 044IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads the random number value for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number = 1 (step 044IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 044IWS5123). That is, the random number value for normal symbol determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passing memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random numbers for determination per ordinary symbol stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective gate passing memory numbers are extracted is always the order of the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number for determination per normal symbol) using the normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not per normal symbol, and whether or not per normal symbol. Is determined (step 044IWS5127). In this feature 038IW, in step 044IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the probability variation state, whether it is in the KT state, or in the high base state. The probability is determined to be per ordinary symbol.

  In step 044IWS5127, when the read random number for normal symbol determination is within the hit range (if it is a win), CPU 103 sets a win symbol as a display result (step 044IWS5128), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130. In step 044IWS5127, if the read random number for normal symbol determination is not within the winning range (if it is out of range), the CPU 103 sets a display symbol as a display result (step 044IWS5129), and proceeds to step 044IWS5130.

  In step 044 IWS 5130, if the high base flag is set, CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step 044 IWS 5130, S 5131). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol variation time (N in step 044 IWS5130, S5132).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 044 IWS 5101) (step 044 IWS 5133).

  FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step 044IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 044 IWS 3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 044 IWS 3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 044IWS 3702), the process is terminated as it is.

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 044IWS5127) (Step 044IWS3703). Note that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is determined by, for example, setting a normal symbol per symbol determination flag when it is determined to be a winning symbol in step 044IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can do.

  When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a winning symbol but a missing symbol (N in step 044IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 044IWS5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to “0” (step 044 IWS 3708).

  In step 044IWS 3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 044IWS 3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 044IWS 3704). That is, if the state is the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the normal electric accessory is released (step 044IWS3706). If the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 044IWS3705). .

  Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory release pre-processing (step 044IWS5103) (step 044IWS3707).

  FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release pre-processing (step 044IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 044IWS3801). Then, CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has reached 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 044IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 044IWS3802), the process is terminated as it is.

  When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the normal electric accessory release has elapsed (Y in step 044IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 044IWS3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 044IWS3805). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 044 IWS 3804).

  As described above, in this feature 038IW, the normal electric accessory release time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the normal electric accessory release time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to start and win the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Accordingly, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

  Note that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second start winning port when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown by the feature portion 038IW. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is released many times compared to the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). Control may be performed such that 1 is set as the number of times of opening of 6B, whereas 2 times is set as the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state. If it does in that way, when it is in the 1st KT state, it can make it easy to make a start winning in the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth by increasing the number of times of opening of variable winning ball device 6B.

  Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B described above, and the variable winning ball device 6B It may be executed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of opening.

  Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to be in an open state (step 044IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation processing (step 044IWS5104) (step 044IWS3807).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIGS. 10-34 to 10-36 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 044 IWS 611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 044IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 044IWS613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 044IWS 614), effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 044IWS615).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 044 IWS 616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 044 IWS 617). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 044 IWS 618).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 044IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 044IWS620). ).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 044IWS621). ), The effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 044IWS622). For example, when a first symbol confirmation designation command is received, a first confirmation command reception flag is set. For example, when a second symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second confirmation command reception flag is set. For example, when a first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, a first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. For example, when a second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, a second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 044IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 044 IWS 625).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 044 IWS 626), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 044 IWS 627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 044 IWS 628).

  In this example, the right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game by executing the processing of steps 044IWS624 and S627.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit start specifying command (step 044IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit start specifying command reception flag (step 044IWS630).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit end specifying command (step 044IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets a small hit end specifying command reception flag (step 044IWS632).

  If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 044IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for starting lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 044IWS634).

  If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 044IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 044IWS636).

  If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / non-KT background designation command (step 044IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 uses a background image in the image display device 5 as a background image corresponding to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, Control is performed to display with a blue background image (step 044IWS638). Further, if set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state (step 044IWS639).

  If the received effect control command is a low-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 044IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the background image in the image display device 5 is a background image corresponding to the low probability / first KT state (for example, The display control is performed with a green background image (step 044IWS641). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 044IWS642) and, if set, the high probability state flag indicating the high probability state or the second KT state indicating the second KT state. The 2KT state flag is reset (step 044IWS643).

  If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 044IWS644), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the background image in the image display device 5 is a background image corresponding to the high probability / first KT state (for example, The display control is performed with the yellow background image (step 044IWS645). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 044IWS646), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 044IWS647).

  If the received effect control command is a high accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 044IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the background image in the image display device 5 is a background image corresponding to the high probability / second KT state (for example, Control is performed to display with a red background image (step 044IWS649). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 044IWS650), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 044IWS651).

  If the received effect control command is a grand prize winning prize designation command (step 044IWS652), the effect control CPU 120 uses the value of the second KT medium prize ball counter for counting the number of prize balls generated during the second KT state. 15 is added (step 044IWS653). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second KT medium prize ball number display 1 indicating the number of prize balls generated during the second KT state in the image display device 5 based on the value of the second KT medium prize ball number counter after the addition. Is displayed, control is performed to update the second KT during-game ball number display 1 (step 044IWS654).

  In this example, the second KT medium winning ball number display 1 is displayed when a 10R probability variation big hit or a 2R probability variation big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and other than 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit. The display is terminated when a big hit occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the second KT mid-award ball counter after the addition is equal to or greater than any threshold value (step 044IWS655). If the value of the second KT middle award ball counter after the addition is equal to or greater than one of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value of the second KT middle award ball counter after the addition in the image display device 5. Then, control is performed to display the second KT winning ball number display 2 (step 044IWS656). For example, if the value of the second KT medium winning ball counter after the addition is 1000, 1005, or 1010, it means that the number of winning balls has reached 1000 in this big winning opening. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and the second KT medium award ball number display 2 indicating that the number of winning balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as “1000 PtOVER” is displayed as the second KT winning ball number display 2 (see FIG. 10-48 (A)).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 044 IWS 657), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the second KT winning ball counter (step 044 IWS 658). Next, the CPU 120 for effect control, if the second KT winning ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the second KT winning ball counter after the addition, the second KT winning ball is displayed. Control to update the number display 1 is performed (step 044IWS659).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the second KT mid-award ball counter after the addition is equal to or greater than any threshold (step 044 IWS 660). If the value of the second KT middle award ball counter after the addition is equal to or greater than one of the threshold values, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value of the second KT middle award ball counter after the addition in the image display device 5. Then, control is performed to display the 2nd KT medium prize ball number display 2 (step 044IWS661). For example, if the value of the second KT mid-award ball counter after the addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of award balls has reached 1000 in this big prize opening. Then, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and the second KT medium winning ball number display 2 indicating that the number of winning balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as “1000 PtOVER” is displayed as the second KT winning ball number display 2 (see FIG. 10-48 (A)).

  In addition, in this example, although the case where the 2nd KT middle prize ball number display 1 is updated or the 2nd KT middle prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on the winning in the big prize opening or the special prize opening is shown, It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when a win to the general winning opening 10 occurs during the second KT state, a value corresponding to the number of winning balls for winning the general winning slot 10 is added to the second KT winning ball counter, Alternatively, the 2KT medium prize ball number display 1 may be updated, or the second KT medium prize ball number display 2 may be displayed. Also, the second KT mid-award ball number display 1 is updated or the second KT mid-term award is displayed only when the special winning opening is won during the second KT state (that is, the case where the winning opening is not included). The ball number display 2 may be displayed.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 120 executes processing for storing the received effect control command and setting a flag according to the received effect control command (step 044 IWS 662). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 044 IWS 611.

  FIG. 10-37 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a variation pattern command is received (step 044IWS811). Whether or not a variation pattern command has been received is determined, for example, by setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 044IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set.

  If the variation pattern command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 executes variation display processing for the corresponding small symbol (step 044 IWS 812). In step 044 IWS 812, for example, a process for executing the variable display of the first small symbol provided in the lower left area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. Corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, the processing for executing the variation display of the second small symbol provided in the lower right region of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-45 is performed. Through the process of step 044 IWS 812, in this feature 038 IW, in both the non-KT state and the KT state, the variation display of the first small symbol is executed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second Corresponding to the special symbol variation display, the second small symbol variation display is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 038 IWS813). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), it is determined whether or not the production control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 038 IWS 814). Note that whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming. If the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed (that is, if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. In the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 038IWS816).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is a case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. (Step 038 IWS815). Note that whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation pattern # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming. If the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed (that is, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 044IWS816).

  By executing the processing of steps 038 IWS 813 to S 815, in this feature portion 038 IW, in the non-KT state, the decorative display of the decorative design is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the display of the first special design. When it is executed and is in the KT state, the decorative display is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. The variation display of the decorative design is not executed.

  FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (step 038 IWS 920). Whether or not the first special symbol variation display is to be executed is determined, for example, by the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifying the first variation pattern # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variable display is a small hit (step 038 IWS 921). Whether or not the current fluctuation display is a small hit is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a display result 7 designation command. Can be determined. If it is a small hit fluctuation, the CPU 120 for effect control determines a non-reach off symbol as a decorative symbol stop symbol (step 038 IWS 922).

  As already described, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, there is only a case where the small hit is A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game I can hardly expect a prize. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 038 IWS 920 to S 922, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is made, the non-reach off symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents excessive expectations from the player.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (N in Step 038IWS920) or when it is not the small hit variation (N in Step 038IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decorative symbol in accordance with the variation display result. Is determined (step 038IWS923). In step 038 IWS 923, when the display control 1 CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of place), the left / right / right decorative pattern is completely different from the left / right decorative pattern. Matched reach-removed symbol combinations are determined. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols in which the left and right decorative symbols are aligned with the symbol “7” among the odd symbols is determined. Further, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when 6R probability variation big hit is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are arranged in odd numbers other than “7” is determined. Further, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that 2R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols including the special symbol (in this example, symbol “R”) is determined. . In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit is determined), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are even-numbered. To decide. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, “135”) is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern is a non-hit lottery variation pattern # 01 (step 038 IWS 924). If it is the non-hit lottery variation pattern # 01, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the special effect (step 038IWS933), and selects a process table corresponding to the special effect based on the variation pattern (step 038IWS934). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step 038 IWS 929.

  If the variation pattern is not the non-hit lottery variation pattern # 01, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current variation display is out of step (step 038 IWS 925). Note that whether or not the current variable display is out of date is, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is a display result 1 designation command. Can be determined. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to step 038IWS929.

  If it is a deviation fluctuation (Y in step 038IWS925), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 038IWS927). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 038 IWS929. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 038IWS927), that is, if it is in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 038IWS928).

  10-39 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, there is no determination for the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, respectively. A value has been allocated. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is an effect that is executed, for example, in a manner in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5. In addition, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is an effect that is executed, for example, in a manner in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is “2”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is obtained. The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the execution ratio is the set value “3”, and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the setting value “4”. Is the next highest, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is “5”, and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest when the setting value is “6” It is low.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-39, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest, and when the set value is “6”, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B The execution rate of is the highest.

  In this example, when the set value is “1”, the jackpot probability is the lowest, and when the set value is “6”, the jackpot probability is the highest. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value “1” is the setting state where the second KT state is most likely to continue (the continuation expectation is high), and the setting value “6”. It can be said that there is a setting state in which the second KT state is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is “6”, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

  As described above, the expected degree of continuation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is an expectation for a long control period to the second KT state without generating a big hit.

  Further, in this example, when the setting value is “1”, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. A sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH) can be further increased.

  Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the decorative pattern variation pattern to be used and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command, A process table corresponding to the RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 044IWS929).

  Next, the production control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in steps 044IWS929 and S934 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 038IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 038 IWS 930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  If execution of the special effect is determined, step 038 IWS 930 and the variable display effect process (step S 172) are executed according to the process table including the special effect selected in step 044 IWS 934, thereby changing the special symbol display. A special effect in which a moving image is played back is executed without displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner (see FIG. 10-46 (2)).

  If the execution of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is determined, step 038 IWS 930 and the variable display effect processing (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 044IWS929. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the decorative symbol variation display (during the deviation variation during the second KT state).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decoration symbol variation time timer and starts the decoration symbol variation time timer (step 038 IWS 931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display effect processing (step S172) (step 038IWS932).

  Note that a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set value may be executed during decorative symbol variation display (for example, during deviation variation). In the feature unit 038IW, the variation display of the second special symbol in the KT state is configured so that the probability of losing differs according to the set value (see FIG. 10-4 (B)). . Therefore, for example, the probability of deviation in the KT state is preliminarily accumulated, and when the display result is lost in the KT state, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value is performed by notifying the probability of deviation in the KT state. You may make it do.

  FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart illustrating the variable display effect process (step S172) in the effect control process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 038 IWS 8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 038 IWS 8102). When the process timer times out (step 038 IWS 8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 038 IWS 8104). Further, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 038 IWS 8105).

  Next, in the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 is in a big hit variation of the second special symbol, and when the first special symbol variation starts (Y in step 038 IWS8105a, Y in S8105b, Y in S8105c). The execution setting for the display in preparation is performed (step 038 IWS8105d). By the processing of step 038 IWS8105d, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, the image display device 5 displays an image including the characters “Preparing for big hit!” As the big hit in preparation display (FIG. 10-46 (3)). reference). Then, by displaying the jackpot preparation display, the player can recognize that the second special symbol that does not currently correspond to the decorative symbol is changing the big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a desirable presentation control that is easy to understand for the player. In the normal state, when the change of the first special symbol is not executed, the demonstration display is executed, and at this time, the display in preparation for jackpot is not executed. With such a configuration, when the game is not being performed, it is possible to prevent notification that the second special symbol is changing the big hit.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 038 IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, 1) whether or not the 1 confirmation command reception flag is set (step 038 IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol waiting process (step S173) (step 038IWS8110).

  If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the production control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 038 IWS8108). If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for replacing the decorative symbol stop symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting processing with the symbol that has been removed (step 038IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S173) (step 038IWS8110).

  If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 038 IWS 8106 (that is, if it is the KT state), whether or not the production control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first KT state flag) (2) Whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 038 IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S173) (step 038IWS8114).

  If the second symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 038 IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 performs processing for replacing the decorative symbol stop symbol determined in step 044IWS923 of the variable display start setting processing with the off symbol (step 038IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S173) (step 038IWS8114).

  When the first forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received at step 038 IWS 8108 or when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command has not been received at step 038 IWS 8112, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decoration symbol variation time timer. Is timed out (step 038 IWS8115). If the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to process data for standby effect (step 038 IWS 8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 038 IWS 8117).

  In this example, as already explained, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a loss, a small hit, and a probable big hit is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first variation time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a loss, small hit, probability variation big hit is being executed, during the small hit game Then, the update of the second variation time timer is interrupted, and the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol variation time timer has timed out in step 038IWS8115 without receiving any symbol confirmation designation command means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted in this way, This is a case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 038 IWS 8116 and S 8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is resumed, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the change display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The “standby effect” is, for example, an effect in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are shaken or slightly changed in the image display device 5 to make a temporary stop state.

  For example, in the image display device 5, for example, when a variable display such as a system small symbol or a fourth symbol is also executed, the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the first special time is displayed. When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is restarted and the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and fourth symbols are displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

  FIG. 10-41 and FIG. 10-42 are flowcharts showing the special figure waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process. In the special symbol waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol stop symbol is set (step 044IWS9701). . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 044IWS9706. In this feature portion 038IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 044IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the big hit effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set is a stage in which the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed but the effect during the big hit is not yet executed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 044IWS9703 is performed. Without execution, the process proceeds to step 044IWS9706.

  If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol stop symbol is set. (Step 044 IWS 9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 044IWS9716. In this feature portion 038IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 044IWS9715. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set is a stage in which the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the small hit is not yet executed, so the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 044IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 044IWS9716 without executing the process.

  If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 causes the stop symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (out-of-order symbols, jackpot symbols to be displayed on the image display device 5). , A small hit symbol) is controlled (step 044IWS9703). If the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with a deviation symbol is executed in steps 038IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 in step 044IWS9703 Controls to confirm and display.

  When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 044 IWS 9703 (Y in step 044 IWS 9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044 IWS 9705).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 044IWS9707).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the type of jackpot that has been generated this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 044IWS9708). Whether or not the big hit type is 10R probability change big hit or 2R probability change big hit is determined, for example, by checking whether or not the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command or a display result 5 designation command. it can. If it is 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, the process proceeds to step 044IWS9710 as it is.

  If neither the 10R-probable big hit or the 2R-probable big hit is in the second KT state, it means that the second KT state is ended after the end of the current big hit game. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 clears the values of the small hit number counter for counting the number of times that the small hit has occurred in the second KT state and the value of the second KT winning ball number counter to zero (step 044IWS9709). In this example, the number of times that a small hit has occurred during the second KT state is counted by the small number of hits counter. For example, the number of times that a small hit has occurred continuously during the second KT state is counted. May be.

  Next, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the big hit production (step 044IWS9710). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 044IWS9711), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, and speakers 8L and 8R as effect components) is executed according to data 1) (step 044IWS9712).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit effect process (step S176) (step 044IWS9713).

  If the big hit symbol is not fixedly displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (N in step 044IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is fixedly displayed in the process of step 044IWS9703 (Y in step 044IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 044IWS9715).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a small hitting start designation command has been received (step 044IWS9716). When the small hitting start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 044IWS9717).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit number counter (step 044IWS9718). Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the small hit count display 1 indicating the small hit count in the second KT state is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the updated value of the small hit count counter. Control to update the winning number display 1 is performed (step 044IWS9719).

  In this example, the small hit count display 1 is displayed when a 10R probability change big hit or 2R probability change big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and a big hit other than the 10R probability change big hit or 2R probability change big hit occurs. The display is ended when it is performed (that is, when the second KT state is ended).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the value of the small hit number counter after the addition is any threshold value (step 044IWS9720). If the value of the small hit count counter after the addition is any threshold value, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small hit count display 2 corresponding to the value of the small hit count counter after the addition. Display control is performed (step 044IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit count counter after addition is 10, it means that the small hit count has reached 10 times due to the occurrence of the small hit this time, so that the threshold “10” has been reached. Determination is made and a small hit count display 2 indicating that the small hit count has reached 10 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “10COMBO” as the small hit count display 2.

  Next, when the second KT state flag is set (Y of step 044IWS9722), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a setting value suggesting effect that suggests the currently set value during the small hit game, and A setting value suggestion effect setting process for determining the type is executed (step 044IWS9723).

  In step 044IWS9723, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 044IWS615). Then, the CPU 120 for effect control performs a lottery process based on a random number using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the setting value suggestion effect. The presence / absence and type of value suggesting effects are determined.

  In this feature 038IW, the set value suggesting effect is executed during the small hit game only in the second KT state. Therefore, in the second KT state, the setting value is set more than in the normal state or the first KT state. Opportunities for suggesting values increase, and interests improve.

  FIGS. 10-43 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table. FIG. 10-43 (A) shows a first set value suggesting effect determination table used when the value of the small hit count counter is less than 30, and FIG. 10-43 (B) shows the small hit count. A second set value suggestion effect determination table used when the value of the counter is 30 or more is shown. As shown in FIGS. 10-43 (A) and (B), the set value suggestion effect determination table includes no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, and set value suggestion effect C. On the other hand, a judgment value is assigned to each.

  The setting value suggestion effect A is an effect executed by, for example, a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggesting effect B is an effect executed by, for example, a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. Is the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggesting effect C is an effect executed by, for example, a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed with a red display color in the image display device 5, and as illustrated in FIG. ”,“ 5 ”, and“ 6 ”, and the execution rate is highest when the setting value is“ 6 ”.

  In this feature 038IW, as the setting value suggesting effect during the small hit game, the image display device 5 performs an effect of displaying a predetermined character image with a predetermined display color. May be performed when notifying that the special prize opening has been opened, or when notifying that the game ball has won the special prize opening. You may be made to perform. Further, the set value suggestion effect is not limited to the small hit game in the second KT state, and may be executed during the variable display.

  When the first set value suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-43 (A) and the second set value suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-43 (B) are compared, the small hit count counter value is less than 30. At a certain time, that is, when the number of small hits in the second KT state is relatively small, the set value suggesting effect is executed at a lower rate than when the small hit number counter value is 30 or more. The difference in the execution ratio is also small. By doing in this way, according to the number of small hits in the 2nd KT state, the reliability (namely, accuracy) of the suggestion by setting value suggestion production can be varied. And, if the number of small hits in the second KT state is 30 or more, the reliability (that is, the accuracy) of the suggestion by the setting value suggestion effect is higher, so the player is interested in the number of small hits in the second KT state. You can have it. Note that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 10-43. When the small hit count counter value is 100 or more, the setting value suggestion is configured such that the reliability (that is, the accuracy) of the suggestion of the setting value suggesting effect is further increased. An effect determination table may be used.

  In addition, the setting value suggestion effect C that is executed only when the setting values are “4”, “5”, and “6” definitely indicates that the setting value is “4” or more (that is, The suggestion reliability (that is, the accuracy) is higher than that of the set value suggestion effects A and B, which is also executed only when the number of small hits in the second KT state is 30 or more. Even with this configuration, the player can be interested in the number of small hits in the second KT state. Note that the setting value suggesting effect C is not limited to the example illustrated in FIGS. 10-43 and may be executed even when the number of small hits in the second KT state is less than 30. However, it is desirable that the rate of execution is lower than when the number of small hits is 30 or more.

  10-43 shows an example in which a different set value suggestion effect determination table is used depending on the number of small hits in the second KT state, but instead of such a configuration, for example, a prize in the second KT state Different setting value suggestion effect determination tables may be used depending on the number of balls. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 10-44, when the value of the second KT middle prize ball counter is less than 1000, the third set value suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-44 (A) is used, and the second KT When the value of the middle prize ball number counter is 1000 or more, the fourth set value suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-44 (B) is used.

  When the third set value suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-44 (A) and the third set value suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 10-44 (B) are compared, the second KT medium winning ball counter value is obtained. When the number of prize balls in the second KT state is relatively small, when the number of prize balls in the second KT state is relatively small, the ratio at which the set value suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the second KT prize ball number counter value is 1000 or more. Furthermore, the difference in the execution ratio between the set values is also small. By doing in this way, according to the number of prize balls in the 2nd KT state, the reliability (namely, accuracy) of suggestion by setting value suggestion production can be varied. And, since the reliability (that is, the accuracy) of the suggestion by the setting value suggestion effect is higher when the number of prize balls in the second KT state is 1000 or more, the player is interested in the number of prize balls in the second KT state. You can have it. Further, the setting value suggestion effect C having high suggestion reliability (that is, accuracy) is configured to be executed only when the number of prize balls in the second KT state is 1000 or more. Even from such a configuration, the player can be interested in the number of prize balls in the second KT state. Note that the setting value suggesting effect C is not limited to the example illustrated in FIGS. 10-44 and may be executed even when the number of prize balls in the second KT state is less than 1000. However, it is desirable that the percentage to be executed is lower than when the number of prize balls is 1000 or more.

  Further, not limited to the examples illustrated in FIGS. 10-43 and 10-44, for example, the reliability of the suggestion by the set value suggestion effect may be varied according to the number of fluctuations in the second KT state. In this case, for example, when the second KT state ends, if the number of fluctuations in the second KT state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the suggestion reliability (that is, the accuracy) is increased. A setting value suggestion effect determination table may be used, and conversely, if the number of changes in the second KT state is less than a predetermined number, in order to reduce the disappointment of the player, A setting value suggestion effect determination table configured to increase the degree (that is, the accuracy) may be used.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the small hitting effect and the set value suggesting effect (step 044IWS9724). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 044IWS9725), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, and speakers 8L and 8R as effect components) is executed according to data 1) (step 044IWS9727).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting effect process (step S174) (step 044IWS9728).

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 044 IWS 9703 (that is, when a loss symbol is displayed) (N in step 044 IWS 9704 and N in step 044 IWS 9714), the production control CPU 120 performs the production control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 044IWS9726).

  Next, an effect aspect of the effect executed in the feature unit 038IW will be described.

  FIGS. 10-45 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect at the time of big hit occurrence. In the display example shown in FIG. 10-45, an effect mode when a big hit occurs based on the variation of the first special symbol is shown.

  When the variation (big hit) of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (1), the image display device 5 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. In the lower left area of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. In the example of FIG. 10-45 (1), since the second special symbol has not started to change, the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower left area of the image display device 5. Yes.

  When the variation (big hit) of the first special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (2), in the image display device 5, the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is the big hit symbol “777”. While being stopped, the first small symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol “7”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-45 (3), the first normal instruction notification is performed. The first normal instruction notification at this time is performed by displaying a first normal instruction image 038IW001 including the characters “right-handed” and a right arrow.

  Although not shown in FIG. 10-45, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, a second normal instruction notification is performed. The second normal instruction notification at this time is performed by displaying the characters “Aim for the gate” and an image showing the game ball passing through the passing gate 41. Thus, it can alert | report appropriately by changing the aspect of alerting | reporting according to a condition.

  FIGS. 10-46 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect in the case of a big hit based on the fluctuation | variation of a 2nd special symbol in a normal state.

  If the first special symbol is not changed even if the second special symbol is being changed in the normal state, the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The demo display 038IW002 is displayed without displaying the change display of the above. However, at this time, the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variably displayed in the lower right region of the image display device 5.

  Here, when the variation of the first special symbol is started, it is forcibly made a non-hit and the variation pattern is determined to be a non-hit lottery variation pattern # 01. Then, when the variation (displacement) of the first special symbol is started, the variation display of the first small symbol is started on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10-46 (2). A special effect in which a moving image is played back is executed without displaying a fluctuating display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol.

  Then, when the fluctuation (displacement) of the first special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (3), the variation display of the first small symbol is stopped and displayed with the deviation symbol “4” in the image display device 5. At the same time, an image including the characters “Preparing the jackpot!” Is displayed as the jackpot preparation display.

  Thereafter, when the variation (big hit) of the second special symbol stops, as shown in FIG. 10-46 (4), the second small symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol “7”, and the first normal instruction notification is performed. . At this time, the stop display of the decorative symbol that becomes the jackpot symbol is not performed. Further, the first normal instruction notification at this time is performed by displaying a first normal instruction image 038IW001 including the characters “right-handed” and a right arrow.

  Although not shown in FIG. 10-46, when 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, the second normal instruction notification is performed. The second normal instruction notification at this time is performed by displaying the characters “Aim for the gate” and an image showing the game ball passing through the passing gate 41. Thus, it can alert | report appropriately by changing the aspect of alerting | reporting according to a condition.

  Next, an effect aspect of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIGS. 10-47 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production | presentation aspect of the setting value suggestion effect in a small hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 10-47 (A), when the decorative symbol variation display is stopped and displayed at the small hit symbol “135” in the image display device 5 and a small hit occurs, FIGS. 10-47 (B1) to (B3). As shown in FIG. 4, the set value suggestion effect is executed during the small hit game.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-47 (B1) to (B3), the setting value suggesting effect is executed by a mode in which a predetermined character image 038IW005, 038IW006, 038IW007 is displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggesting effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (B1), the image display device 5 is set according to a mode in which a predetermined character image 038IW005 is displayed with a blue display color. A value suggestion effect is executed. For example, when the set value suggesting effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (B2), the set value is set according to a mode in which a predetermined character image 038IW006 is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (B3), the set value is set according to a mode in which a predetermined character image 038IW007 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. The suggestion effect is executed.

  Next, a modified example of the set value suggestion effect will be described. The feature unit 038IW is configured to be able to execute a setting value suggesting effect in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a predetermined display color during the small hit game. In addition to this, for example, the second KT middle prize You may comprise so that the setting value suggestion production which suggests a setting value by the display mode of the number display 2 of balls can be performed. The 2nd KT medium prize ball number display 2 is mainly for indicating that the number of prize balls has reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000) (for example, in the image display device 5, the number of 2nd KT medium prize balls). The display of the character display such as “1000PtOVER” as the display 2), and the control for displaying the second KT medium winning ball number display 2 can be said to be a prize ball number emphasizing effect that emphasizes the number of winning balls. Hereinafter, an example in which the prize ball number emphasizing effect also serves as a set value suggesting effect that suggests a set value will be described.

  In this feature 038IW, for example, if the value of the second KT medium prize ball counter after addition is 1005, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000, so the threshold value is set to “1000”. As shown in FIG. 10-48 (A), characters such as “1000PtOVER” are displayed on the image display device 5 as the second KT winning ball number display 2 indicating that the number of winning balls has reached 1,000. Display 038IW008a is displayed.

  The threshold value to be compared with the value of the second KT middle prize ball counter is set in 1000 units such as 1000, 2000, etc., and the second KT middle prize ball number display 2 is displayed as “1000PtOVER” or “2000PtOVER” in principle. However, as an exception, as shown in FIG. 10-48 (B), when the value of the second KT medium prize ball counter exceeds a predetermined threshold 456 (or 1456, 2456, etc.) A lottery to determine whether or not to execute an emphasis effect (that is, a setting value suggestion effect) is performed, and in accordance with the determination result, the character display 038IW008b (or “1456PtOVER” or “2456PtOVER” or “2456PtOVER” is displayed as the second KT medium prize ball number display 2. Etc.) to indicate that the current set value is “4”, “5”, or “6”. There. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-48 (C), when the value of the second KT medium winning ball counter exceeds a predetermined threshold value 555 (or 1555, 2555, etc.) In other words, a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a set value suggestion effect) is performed, and according to the determination result, the character display 038IW008c (or “1555PtOVER”, “2555PtOVER”, etc.) of “555PtOVER”, etc. May be displayed to suggest that the current set value is “5”.

  10-48 (B) and (C), for example, “456” and “555” are provided in advance as threshold values to be compared with the value of the second KT middle prize ball number counter. When the value of the second KT middle prize ball counter exceeds the prize ball number enhancement effect (that is, the set value suggestion effect) for displaying the characters “456 PtOVER” and “555 PtOVER” as the second KT middle prize ball number display 2. This can be realized by determining whether or not to execute. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-49, the execution rate of the setting value suggesting effect or the setting value according to the number of small hits (or the number of fluctuations) until the threshold value “456” or “555” is reached. The reliability (that is, the accuracy) of the suggestion for may be different.

  The feature unit 038IW is configured to suggest the setting value set by the setting value suggesting effect. In addition to such a configuration, the setting change process is performed at the time of power-on by the setting value suggesting effect. It may be suggested that the process has been performed, or conversely that the setting change process has not been performed. For example, when a setting change process is performed when the power is turned on, a command indicating that fact is transmitted, and the setting change process is performed based on whether or not a command is received. The execution of the set value suggesting effect that suggests that the operation has not been performed may be determined.

  According to the feature unit 038IW, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination value (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination) for determining the display result of the variable display. . The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for determining that a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display, and a variable display. The display result includes a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining that a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed. Moreover, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to a non-specific state and when controlled to a specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). -4). Therefore, appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, if the lottery probability or type distribution other than the jackpot winning probability changes depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in the performance of the ball) may become too prominent depending on the setting value, and the gambling may be excessively high There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 038IW, the difference in the degree of advantage is prevented from becoming excessively large depending on the set value by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the common winning probability is small hit). In addition, it prevents the euphoria from becoming excessively high.

  Further, according to the feature unit 038IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Also, the special state type is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. The number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in this feature unit 038IW, by making the number of special type determination values common regardless of the set value (sharing the small hit type common), the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming large, and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the allocation of the small hit types is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be varied depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

  Further, according to this feature 038IW, it is possible to control a plurality of kinds of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation per unit, 6R probability variation per unit, 6R normal variation per unit, 2R probability variation per unit, 2R normal variation per unit, 2R normal unit per unit). Further, the type of advantageous state is determined using an advantageous type determination value (for example, a big hit type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in this feature unit 038IW, the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the setting value by making the number of advantageous type determination values common regardless of the setting value (sharing the jackpot type is common). To prevent excessively high euphoria.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the allocation of the jackpot type is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the jackpot type determination ratio may be varied depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

  Further, according to the feature unit 038IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in this feature unit 038IW, by making the number of variable display mode determination values common regardless of the setting value (sharing the variation pattern sharing), the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the setting value. It prevents it from becoming large, and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous for factors other than the big hit lottery The degree (difference in the performance of balls) is greatly different, which is not preferable, but in this feature unit 038IW, such a problem can be prevented by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value. ing.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the case where the allocation of the variation pattern is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, by varying the determination rate of the variation pattern depending on which of the setting values “1” to “6” and providing a difference in variation time, the variation efficiency varies depending on the setting value. You may comprise so that a difference may come out in an advantage by a value.

  Further, according to the feature unit 038IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player It is. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, and the special display result as the variable display display result. A special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hits judgment) for deciding to derive and display a variable display, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of variable display And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of deviation). Moreover, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in determination values corresponding to all the setting values, and the number of the predetermined determination values varies depending on the setting values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value and improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the feature unit 038IW, it is possible to control between a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more easily controlled to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in determination values corresponding to specific states of all setting values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

  Further, according to the feature unit 038IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be performed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed). The variable display can be executed in parallel). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is possible. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

  Further, according to the feature unit 038IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the frequency of the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result. In addition, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, a missing symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a setting value suggesting effect (for example, the setting shown in FIGS. Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

  Further, according to the feature unit 038IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. In addition, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. It is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for determining that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display display result, and the special display result as the variable display display result. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Moreover, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) having different numbers of specific determination values. The number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game play.

  As described above, this feature unit 038IW discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-33787, in a gaming machine, a lottery based on a variation pattern random number is performed based on a symbol set in a jackpot determination process (a jackpot symbol, a small bonus symbol, a lost symbol) Determining the pattern is described.

  However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-33787, the determination ratio of the variable display pattern of the variable display corresponding to the display result different from the specific display result is the same regardless of the situation. It is enough.

  In view of this, the feature unit 038IW discloses the configurations of the following means (means A1) to (means A5) in order to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can execute the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) in parallel. Yes (for example, a part for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)), and when a specific display result (for example, jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and variable display result determination means for determining a variable display result (for example, steps 038IWS59A, S64A, S59B in the game control microcomputer 100) , S64B), and the variable display pattern is determined based on the variable display result determination means. Variable display pattern determining means (for example, a part that executes a process corresponding to step 038IWS1706A of the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the gaming control microcomputer 100). When variable display of one of the identification information and the second identification information is started and variable display corresponding to the specific display result of the other identification information is being executed, the one identification information The variable display result is determined to be a display result different from the specific display result (for example, the part corresponding to step 038IWS57A and step 038IWS57B in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). Identification information of either one of identification information and second identification information Ratio of determining a specific variable display pattern for variable display of one identification information depending on whether or not variable display corresponding to the specific display result of the other identification information is being executed when variable display is started Are different (for example, the ratio determined in the non-hit lottery variation pattern is different, see FIG. 10-7).
According to such a structure, since the ratio determined to a specific variable display pattern differs, an interest can be improved.

(Means A2) In the means A1, special state control means (for example, steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is different from the advantageous state. And special state control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, the KT state) that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the non-special state after the advantageous state ends. Step 044 IWS2208, S2211, S2213, S2214, etc.).
According to such a configuration, interest can be improved.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or means A2, the variable display pattern determining means is configured such that, in the special state, when variable display of any one of the first identification information and the second identification information is started, the other When the variable display result of the one identification information is determined to be different from the specific display result based on the fact that the variable display corresponding to the specific display result of the identification information is being executed, the other identification information The identification of the one identification information is compared with the case where the variable display result of the identification information is not determined to be different from the specific display result based on the fact that the variable display corresponding to the specific display result is being executed. The ratio of variable display of information is determined to be a variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, non-big hit lottery variation pattern # 02 is determined) Ratio is high. Figure 10-7 (D) refer) it may be configured so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine a suitable variable display pattern according to the situation, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to A3, the variable display pattern determining means starts variably displaying either one of the first identification information and the second identification information in the non-special state. The variable display result corresponding to the specific display result of the other identification information is determined to be a display result different from the specific display result based on the fact that the variable display corresponding to the specific display result of the other identification information is being executed. Sometimes, when the variable display result corresponding to the specific display result of the other identification information is being executed, the variable display result of the one identification information is not determined to be a display result different from the specific display result. The variable display pattern is determined to be a special variable display pattern (for example, the non-big hit lottery variation pattern # 01 is determined. See FIG. 10-7 (C)). Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, special effect) at a certain time (for example, step 038 IWS 930 and variable display effect process (step S 172) according to the process table including the special effect selected in step 038 IWS 934 in the CPU 120 for effect control) ) May be provided.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be suitably executed according to the situation, and the interest can be improved.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to means A4, presentation identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information Variable display execution means (for example, a part for executing step 038 IWS 930 and variable display effect processing (step S 172) in the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. When the variable display of the presentation identification information is being executed in correspondence with the variable display of the identification information of any one of and when the variable display corresponding to the specific display result of the other identification information is being executed, Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, display in preparation for jackpot) for notifying that the variable display result of the other identification information becomes the specific display result , It may be configured to include a portion) for performing the steps 038IWS8105d in effect control CPU 120.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be suitably executed according to the situation, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, the feature unit 038IW discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-33787 describes that in the probability variation gaming state, the frequency of small hit control is increased.

  However, as with the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-33787, just being configured to execute the effect associated with the small hits is insufficient.

  Therefore, in this feature 038IW, the following means (means B1) to (means B6) are configured to solve the problem of providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state. Is disclosed.

(Means B1) In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming machine according to the present invention has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player and a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state. Specially controllable to a non-special state (for example, a non-KT state) and a special state (for example, a KT state) that is more frequently controlled to a special state than the non-special state. State control means (for example, a portion for executing steps 044IWS2208, S2211, S2213, S2214, etc. in the gaming control microcomputer 100) and any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”) Setting means that can be set to any of the set values (for example, steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) And a game control means (for example, a portion for executing steps 038IWS59A and S59B in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value, and a special state. Sometimes, a setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect related to the setting means (for example, a portion executing step 044IWS9726 according to a process table including the setting value suggestion effect selected in step 044IWS9724 in the effect control CPU 120). It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, interest in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state can be improved.

(Means B2) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display in means B1, and having an advantageous state that can be controlled to an advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the variable display result Control means (for example, a part for executing steps S122 to S125 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol as a variable display result). ) Is displayed and displayed in a special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and a variable display result Using the determination value (for example, determination value for big hit determination, determination value for small hit determination) Variable display result determining means for determining a variable display result (for example, a portion for executing steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, and S64B in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the determination value includes a specific display result as a variable display result Specific judgment value (for example, judgment value for big hit judgment) and special judgment value (for example, small hit value) for deciding to display and display special display result as variable display result Determination number), and the number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate game play.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or B2, the setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the control of the special state (for example, the setting value suggestion effect can be executed during the small hit game). Yes, see FIG. 10-47).
According to such a structure, the interest of setting suggestion production can be improved.

(Means B4) In any one of the means B1 to B3, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets as the setting suggestion effect more than the first set value suggestion effect indicating the set value and the first set value suggestion effect. The second set value suggesting effect having a high degree of reliability of the suggestion for the value can be executed, and the second set value suggesting effect can be executed at a different ratio according to the number of times of control of the special state in the special state (for example, the first When the number of small hits in the 2KT state is 30 times or more, a setting value suggestion effect having a higher suggestion reliability (that is, higher accuracy) is executed than when it is less than 30 times. When the number of small hits in the second KT state is 30 times or more, the ratio of execution of the set value suggestion effect C having a higher suggestion reliability (that is, higher accuracy) than when it is less than 30 times 1 is high. -43 (A), may be configured as (B) refer).
According to such a structure, the interest of setting suggestion production can be improved.

(Means B5) In any one of the means B1 to B4, the setting suggestion effect execution means sets the setting suggestion effect more than the first set value suggestion effect indicating the set value and the first set value suggestion effect. The second set value suggesting effect having a high degree of reliability of the suggestion for the value can be executed, and the second set value suggesting effect can be executed at a different ratio depending on the game value given in the special state (for example, the first When the number of prize balls in the 2KT state is 1000 or more, a setting value suggestion effect with higher suggestion reliability (that is, higher accuracy) is executed than when it is less than 1000. When the number of prize balls in the 2KT state is 1000 or more, the set value suggestion effect C having a higher suggestion reliability (that is, higher accuracy) is executed than when it is less than 1000 times. Figure 0-44 (A), may be configured as (B) refer).
According to such a structure, the interest of setting suggestion production can be improved.

(Means B6) In any one of the means B1 to B5, the setting suggestion effect executing means sets as the setting suggestion effect more than the first set value suggestion effect indicating the set value and the first set value suggestion effect. The second set value suggesting effect having a high degree of reliability of the suggestion for the value can be executed, and the second set value suggesting effect can be executed at a different ratio according to the number of executions of the variable display in the special state (for example, the first When the number of fluctuations in the second KT state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number when the 2KT state ends, the set value suggestion has a higher reliability of reliability (that is, the accuracy is higher) than when the number of fluctuations is less than the predetermined number. For example, when the second KT state ends, if the number of changes in the second KT state is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the reliability of the suggestion is greater than the case where the number is less than the predetermined number. Is high (I.e. probable) ratio set value suggested presentation C is performed is high.) It may be configured so.
According to such a structure, the interest of setting suggestion production can be improved.

  Note that the configuration indicated by the feature portion 038IW can be combined with the configuration indicated by the feature portion 21TM as appropriate to constitute a gaming machine. For example, when a configuration in which the setting value indicated by the feature portion 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature portion 038IW, and the variation display of one special symbol is started, the variation display corresponding to the jackpot of the other special symbol Depending on whether or not is being executed, the ratio for determining the specific variable display pattern for the variable display of the one special symbol may be different. In addition, for example, a configuration in which the setting value indicated by the feature portion 21TM can be changed may be applied to the feature portion 038IW so that the setting value suggesting effect can be executed in the second KT state. In addition, the configuration indicated by the feature portion 038IW may be applied to a gaming machine in which no KT state is provided. For example, for a gaming machine that does not have a KT state, when the variable display of one special symbol is started, whether or not the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the other special symbol is being executed, It may be configured such that the ratio of the special symbol variation display determined to a specific variation display pattern is different. Further, in the feature unit 038IW, an example in which a dedicated variation pattern table is selected and used when the other special symbol is in a big hit variation is shown, but such processing may be omitted. For example, when the change display of one special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is started and the other special symbol is changing big hit, the big hit lottery of one special symbol In the display of fluctuation of one special symbol, the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit variation is not selected, and when the other special symbol is in the big hit variation, the big hit variation is compared to the other cases. The present invention may be applied to a case where the selection ratio of the corresponding variation pattern is low.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... LED control board 15 ... Relay board 17 ... Special variable winning ball apparatus 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player and a special state different from the advantageous state,
A special state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state that is more frequently controlled to the special state than the non-special state;
A setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values;
Game control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on a set value;
A setting suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect related to the setting means when controlled in the special state.

Images